Contents A-Z OWNER'S MANUAL. MINI COUNTRYMAN. MINI PACEMAN.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15
COOPER Owner's Manual for Vehicle COOPER S Thank you for choosing a MINI. JOHN COOPER The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest: WORKS Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI. It contains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your MINI. The manual also contains information designed to en‐ hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your MINI. Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐ chures in the onboard literature. Set off now and have fun with your MINI. The MINI Team of BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 © 2015 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English II/15, 03 15 500 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Addendum
ADDENDUM TO OWNER'S MANUAL
We wanted to provide you with some updates that any such parts and/or accessories are and clarifications with respect to the printed appropriate for use on your vehicle. MINI Owner's Manual. These updates and clari- 4. At page 6 and page 7, under the warranty fications will supersede the materials contained section's discussion of homologation, where in that document. it states that you “cannot lodge warranty 1. Where the terms “service center,” “the ser- claims for your vehicle there,” the text vice center,” “your service center,” “service should read that you “may not be able to specialist,” or “service” are used in the Ow- lodge warranty claims for your vehicle ner's Manual, we wanted to clarify that the there.” terms refer to a MINI dealer's service center 5. At page 7, in the “Parts and accessories” sec- or another service center or repair shop that tion, the sentence beginning “For your own employs trained personnel that can perform safety … ,” should be disregarded and the maintenance and repair work on your ve- following the text should be read in lieu the- hicle in accordance with MINI specifications. reof: “The manufacturer of your vehicle re- 2. Where the text of the Owner's Manual con- commends using genuine MINI parts and tains an affirmative instruction to contact a accessories.” In the fifth sentence of that pa- “service center” or “your service center,” we ragraph, the word “cannot” should read wanted to clarify that MINI recommends “does not.” that, if you are faced with one of the situa- 6. At page 48, in the “Checking and replacing tions addressed by that text, you contact or safety belts” section, the text beginning, seek the assistance of a MINI dealer's service “Have the work performed only by your ser- center or another service center or repair vice center …” should be disregarded and shop that employs trained personnel that the following text should be read in lieu the- can perform maintenance and repair work reof: “MINI recommends having this work on your vehicle in accordance with MINI performed by a service center as it is impor- specifications. tant that this safety feature functions pro- While MINI, at no cost to you, will pay for re- perly.” pairs required by the limited warranties pro- 7. At page 122 under the heading: “Objects in vided with respect to your vehicle and for the area around the pedals” and at page maintenance under the Maintenance Pro- 253 under the heading: “Carpets/floor gram during the applicable warranty and mats,” the paragraph that begins: “Only use maintenance coverage periods, you are free floor mats …” should be disregarded and to elect, both during those periods and the- the following language should be read in reafter, to have maintenance and repair lieu thereof: “The manufacturer of your ve- work provided by other service centers or hicle recommends that you use floor mats repair shops. that have been identified by it as appropri- 3. Where the Owner's Manual makes reference ate for use in your vehicle and that can be to parts and accessories having been appro- properly fixed in place.” ved by MINI, those references are intended 8. At page 129, under the heading: “Have to reflect that those parts and accessories maintenance carried out,” the sentence be- are recommended by MINI. You may elect ginning, “Have the maintenance carried to use other parts and accessories, but, if out …” should be disregarded and the fol- you do, we recommend that you make sure lowing text should be read in lieu thereof:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Addendum
“MINI recommends that you have the main- center or another service center or repair tenance carried out by your service center.” shop that employs trained personnel that 9. At page 207, under the heading “Software can perform maintenance and repair work applications,” the text of that section should on your vehicle in accordance with MINI be disregarded and the following text read specifications. The manufacturer of your ve- in lieu thereof: “The manufacturer of your hicle recommends that you maintain re- vehicle recommends the use of MINI recom- cords of all maintenance and repair work mended software; otherwise there may be performed on your vehicle. malfunctions in system operations.” 14. At page 243, under the “Battery replace- 10. At page 216, under the heading “Pressure ment” section, the text should be disregar- specifications,” the sentence beginning, ded and in lieu thereof the following text “The inflation pressures apply to the tire si- should be read: zes approved … .” should be disregarded. Use of recommended vehicle batteries 11. At page 223, under the heading: “Approved The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- wheels and tires,” the term “Approved” mends that you use vehicle batteries that it should be disregarded and in lieu thereof, has tested and recommends for use in your the term “Recommended” should be read in vehicle; otherwise the vehicle could be da- its place. In addition, the text of that section maged and systems or functions may not be should be disregarded and the following fully available. text should be read in lieu thereof: After a battery replacement, the manufactu- The manufacturer of your vehicle strongly rer of your vehicle recommends that you suggests that you use wheels and tires that have the battery registered on your vehicle have been recommended by the vehicle by a service center to ensure that all comfort manufacturer for your vehicle type; other- functions are fully available, and that any wise, for example, despite having the same “check control” messages of these comfort official size ratings, variations can lead to functions are no longer displayed. body contact and with it, the risk of severe accidents. The manufacturer of your vehicle does not evaluate non-recommended wheels and ti- res to determine if they are suitable for use on your vehicle. 12. At page 229, under the heading “Hood,” the sentence beginning, “If you are unfamiliar” should be disregarded. 13. At page 233, under the heading: “Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US Models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian Models,” the second paragraph should be disregarded and the following text read in lieu thereof: The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- mends that you have maintenance and re- pair performed by your MINI dealer's service
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ ENTERTAINMENT ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to 154 Tone page 268. 156 Radio 164 CD/multimedia
6 Notes COMMUNICATION 178 Bluetooth hands-free system AT A GLANCE 188 Bluetooth mobile phone preparation 12 Cockpit package 18 Onboard monitor 199 Office 24 Voice activation system 207 MINI Connected
CONTROLS MOBILITY 30 Opening and closing 212 Refueling 44 Adjusting 214 Fuel 52 Transporting children safely 216 Wheels and tires 57 Driving 228 Engine compartment 67 Displays 230 Engine oil 77 Lamps 232 Coolant 81 Safety 233 Maintenance 92 Driving stability control systems 235 Replacing components 96 Driving comfort 245 Breakdown assistance 99 Climate 250 Care 105 Interior equipment 115 Storage compartments REFERENCE 258 Technical data DRIVING TIPS 262 Short commands for voice activation 120 Things to remember when driving 268 Everything from A to Z 124 Loading 128 Saving fuel
NAVIGATION 132 Navigation system 134 Destination entry 143 Destination guidance 151 What to do if...
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 6
Notes
Notes
Using this Owner's Vehicle equipment Manual The manufacturer of your MINI is the Bayeri‐ sche Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft, BMW The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ AG. ular topic is by using the index. This Owner's Manual describes all models, all An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in series equipment, as well as country-specific the first chapter. and special equipment offered in the model Additional sources of information series. Therefore, this Owner's Manual also de‐ scribes and depicts equipment that may not be Should you have any questions, your service contained in your vehicle because of the se‐ center will be glad to advise you at any time. lected special equipment or country version, for Information on MINI, e.g., on technology, is example. available on the Internet: www.mini.com This also applies to safety-related functions and Information about MINI, e.g., on technology, is systems. available on the Internet: www.miniusa.com For options and equipment not described in this Owner's Manual, please refer to the Sup‐ plementary Owner's Manuals. Symbols Indicates precautions that must be followed precisely in order to avoid the possibility of Status of this Owner's personal injury and serious damage to the Manual at time of print‐ vehicle. ing ◄ Marks the end of a specific item of information. The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a policy of constant development that is con‐ "..." Identifies Control Display texts used to ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to select individual functions. embody the highest quality and safety stan‐ ›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐ activation system. scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from ››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the those in your vehicle. voice activation system. Refers to measures that can be taken to For your own safety help protect the environment. Warranty Symbols on vehicle components Your vehicle is technically configured for the Indicates that you should consult the operating conditions and registration require‐ relevant section of this Owner's Manual for ments applying in the country of first delivery information on a particular part or assembly. — homologation. If your vehicle is to be oper‐ ated in a different country it might be neces‐
6 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 7
Notes
sary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differ‐ including operation of any mobile phone from ing operating conditions and permit within the vehicle without using an externally requirements. If your vehicle does not comply mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, with the homologation requirements in a cer‐ for instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radios or tain country you cannot lodge warranty claims similar accessories, may cause extensive dam‐ for your vehicle there. Further information can age to the vehicle, compromise its safety, inter‐ be obtained from your Service Center. fere with the vehicle's electrical system or af‐ fect the validity of the MINI Limited Warranty. Maintenance and repairs See your MINI center for additional informa‐ Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern tion. Maintenance, replacement, or repair of materials and high-performance electronics, the emission control devices and systems may requires suitable maintenance and repair be performed by any automotive repair estab‐ methods. lishment or individual using any certified auto‐ motive part. Therefore, have this work performed only by a MINI service center or a workshop that works California Proposition 65 Warning according to MINI repair procedures with ap‐ propriately trained personnel. California laws require us to state the following warning: If this work is not carried out properly, there is Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐ the danger of subsequent damage and related bile components and parts, including compo‐ safety hazards. nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐ cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the Parts and accessories State of California to cause cancer and birth de‐ For your own safety, it is recommended that fects and reproductive harm. In addition, cer‐ you use genuine parts and accessories ap‐ tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain proved by MINI. When you purchase accesso‐ products of component wear contain or emit ries tested and approved by MINI and Genuine chemicals known to the State of California to MINI Parts, you simultaneously acquire the as‐ cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ surance that they have been thoroughly tested ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐ by MINI to ensure optimum performance when lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐ installed on your vehicle. MINI warrants these pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used parts to be free from defects in material and engine oil contains chemicals that have caused workmanship. MINI will not accept any liability cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect for damage resulting from installation of parts your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and and accessories not approved by MINI. MINI water. cannot test every product made by other man‐ ufacturers to verify if it can be used on a MINI Service and warranty safely and without risk to either the vehicle, its We recommend that you read this publication operation, or its occupants. Genuine MINI Parts, thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐ MINI Accessories and other products approved lowing warranties: by MINI, together with professional advice on using these items, are available from all MINI ▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty. centers. Installation and operation of non MINI ▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty. approved accessories such as alarms, radios, ▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty. amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension ▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty. components, brake dust shields, telephones,
7 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 8
Notes
▷ California Emission Control System Limited and faults, either temporarily or permanently. Warranty. This technical information generally documents Detailed information about these warranties is the state of a component, a module, a system listed in the Service and Warranty Information or the environment: Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and ▷ Operating conditions of system compo‐ Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. nents, such as filling levels. Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and ▷ Status messages from the vehicle and its in‐ designed to meet the particular operating con‐ dividual components, such as wheel rpm/ ditions and homologation requirements in your speed, motion delay, transverse accelera‐ country and continental region in order to de‐ tion. liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is ▷ Malfunctions and defects in important sys‐ operated under those conditions. If you wish to tem components, such as lights and brakes. operate your vehicle in another country or re‐ ▷ Vehicle responses to special driving situa‐ gion, you may be required to adapt your vehi‐ tions, such as airbag deployment, use of cle to meet different prevailing operating con‐ the stability control systems. ditions and homologation requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable war‐ ▷ Ambient conditions, such as the tempera‐ ranty limitations or exclusions for such country ture. or region. In such case, please contact Cus‐ These data are of a technical nature only and tomer Relations for further information. are used to detect and eliminate faults and to optimize vehicle functions. Travel profiles of Maintenance routes driven with the vehicle cannot be cre‐ Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the ated from these data. If services are used, for road safety, operational reliability and the New instance in the event of repairs, service proc‐ Vehicle Limited Warranty. esses, warranty cases, quality assurance, etc., this technical information can be read out from Specifications for required maintenance meas‐ the event and fault data memories by service ures: personnel, including the manufacturer, using ▷ MINI Maintenance system special diagnosis tools. This service personnel ▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet can provide you with more information if for US models needed. After troubleshooting, the information ▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for in the fault memory is cleared or overwritten Canadian models continuously. If the vehicle is not maintained according to Situations are conceivable during the use of the these specifications, this could result in serious vehicle in which these technical data could be‐ damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not come associated with a specific person in com‐ covered by the MINI New Vehicle Limited War‐ bination with other information, such as an ac‐ ranty. cident report, damage to the vehicle, witness accounts, etc., possibly with the involvement of an authorized expert. Data memory Additional functions that are contractually agreed with the customer, such as vehicle lo‐ Numerous electronic components in your vehi‐ calization in the event of an emergency, permit cle contain data memories that store technical the transfer of certain vehicle data out of the information on the vehicle condition, events vehicle.
8 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 9
Notes
Event Data Recorder EDR Reporting safety defects This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐ For US customers corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐ The following only applies to vehicles owned tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting and operated in the US. a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐ If you believe that your vehicle has a defect standing how a vehicle's systems performed. which could cause a crash or could cause injury The EDR is designed to record data related to or death, you should immediately inform the vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short National Highway Traffic Safety Administration period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New such data as: Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117. ▷ How various systems in your vehicle were operating. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a ▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it safety belts were fastened. may order a recall and remedy campaign. ▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing However, NHTSA cannot become involved in the accelerator and/or brake pedal. individual problems between you, your dealer, ▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling. or BMW of North America, LLC. These data can help provide a better under‐ To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle standing of the circumstances in which crashes Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 and injuries occur. (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe‐ EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are re‐ Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐ You can also obtain other information about tions and no personal data, e.g., name, gender, motor vehicle safety from http://www.safe‐ age, and crash location, are recorded. rcar.gov However, other parties, such as law enforce‐ ment, could combine the EDR data with the For Canadian customers type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐ Canadian customers who wish to report a quired during a crash investigation. safety- related defect to Transport Canada, De‐ To read data recorded by an EDR, special fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐ the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐ also obtain other information about motor ve‐ hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law hicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsaf‐ enforcement, that have the special equipment, ety. can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
9 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15
WATCH ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATION
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 12
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
Cockpit
Vehicle equipment special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ This chapter describes all series equipment as tems. well as country-specific and special equipment When using the features and systems described offered for this model series. Therefore, it also here, adhere to local regulations. describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
All around the steering wheel
1 Setting the exterior mirror, folding it in and 2 Parking lights 77 out 49 Power windows, front 42 Low beams 77
MINI Countryman: power win‐ Automatic headlamp con‐ dows, rear 42 trol 77 MINI Countryman: safety switch Adaptive Light Control 79 for rear power windows 43 Turn signal 60
12 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 13
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
High-beams 60 Steering wheel buttons, left Headlight flasher 60 Volume Roadside parking lights 78 Bluetooth hands-free sys‐ tem 178 Computer 68 Bluetooth mobile phone prepara‐ tion package 188 3 Tachometer 68 Activate/deactivate the voice acti‐ Instrument lighting 79 vation system 24
Change the radio station Resetting the trip odometer 67 Select a music track Scroll through the redial list
4 Washer/wiper system 60
8 Horn, the entire surface 5 Start/stop the engine and switch 9 Adjust the steering wheel 51 the ignition on/off 57 10 Releasing the hood 229
6 Ignition lock 57 7 Steering wheel buttons, right Resuming cruise control 97
Storing the speed and accelerat‐ ing or slowing down 97
Activating/deactivating cruise control 96
13 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 14
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
Displays
1 Tachometer 68 ▷ Odometer and trip odometer 67 with indicator and warning lights 15 ▷ Flat Tire Monitor 84 2 Display for ▷ Tire Pressure Monitor 86 ▷ Current speed 67 ▷ Settings and information 70 ▷ Indicator/warning lights 15 ▷ Personal Profile settings 30 3 Resetting the trip odometer 67 5 Instrument lighting 79 4 Display for 6 Speedometer with indicator and warning ▷ Steptronic transmission position 64 lights 15 ▷ On-board computer 68 7 Control Display 18 ▷ Service requirements 73 8 Fuel gauge 68
14 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 15
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
Indicator/warning lights Indicator lights without text messages The following indicator lamps notify you that The concept certain functions are active: Symbol Function or system Turn signal, refer to page 60
High-beams/headlight flasher, refer to page 60 The indicator and warning lights can light up in a variety of combinations and colors in display Front fog lights, refer to page 79 area 1 or 2. Several of the lights are checked for proper DSC or DTC is regulating the propul‐ functioning when the engine is started or the sive forces in order to maintain driv‐ ignition is switched on, and light up briefly. ing stability, refer to page 92
Text messages The parking brake is set, refer to page 59 Text messages at the upper edge of the Control Display explain the meaning of the displayed Engine malfunction with adverse ef‐ indicator and warning lights. fect on emissions, refer to page 234 Supplementary text messages Cruise control, refer to page 96 You can call up more information, e.g., on the cause of a malfunction and on how to respond, via Check Control, refer to page 74. In urgent cases, this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding light comes on.
15 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 16
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
All around the center console
1 Hazard warning system Front fog lamps 79 2 Speedometer with Control Display 14 3 Radio 156 Sport button 94 CD/multimedia 156
4 Air conditioning, automatic climate con‐ Driving stability control systems trol 100 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ 5 Buttons on the center console trol 92 Seat heating 46 DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐ trol 93 Central locking, inside 34 6 Storage compartment
16 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 17
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
All around the head‐ liner
1 Indicator/warning lights for the front pas‐ senger airbags 83 2 Reading lights 80
Ambient lighting color 80
Glass sunroof, electrical 40
Interior lights 80
All around the shift/ selector lever
1 MINI joystick with buttons 19 2 USB audio interface 168
17 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 18
AT A GLANCE Onboard monitor
Onboard monitor
Vehicle equipment Control elements at a This chapter describes all series equipment as glance well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series. Therefore, it also Control elements describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using the features and systems described here, adhere to local regulations.
The concept 1 Control Display The onboard monitor combines the functions 2 MINI joystick with buttons of a large number of different switches. Thus, The buttons can be used to open the me‐ these functions can be operated from a central nus directly. The MINI joystick can be used location. to select menu items and create settings. Using the onboard monitor during a trip To avoid becoming distracted and posing Control Display an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu‐ pants and to other road users, never attempt to Hints use the controls or enter information unless ▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the care traffic and road conditions allow this.◀ instructions, refer to page 253. ▷ Do not place objects close to the Control Display; otherwise, the Control Display can be damaged.
Switch off 1. Move the MINI joystick repeatedly to the right until the "Options" menu appears.
18 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 19
Onboard monitor AT A GLANCE
2. "Switch off control display" Buttons on the MINI joystick
Press button Function Open the main menu.
Changes to another menu.
Operating concept Switching on Start screen Press the MINI joystick to switch on. In the radio ready state and higher, the follow‐ MINI joystick with buttons ing message appears on the Control Display: Select menu items and create settings. 1. Turn, arrow 1.
To hide the message: press the MINI joystick. The main menu is displayed. The message is automatically hidden after ap‐ 2. Press, arrow 2. prox. 10 seconds. 3. Move in four directions. Opening the main menu
Press the button.
The main menu is displayed.
19 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 20
AT A GLANCE Onboard monitor
All onboard monitor functions can be called up via the main menu.
Selecting menu items Menu items shown in white can be selected. 1. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired menu item is highlighted.
White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐ cate that additional panels can be opened.
View of an opened menu When a menu is opened, it generally opens with the panel that was last selected in that menu. To display the first panel of a menu: Move the MINI joystick to the left repeatedly 2. Press the MINI joystick. until the first panel is displayed. A new menu is displayed or the function is per‐ formed. Opening the Options menu With the button on the MINI joystick: Move the MINI joystick repeatedly to the right until the "Options" menu appears. Press the button. The menu items of the main menu can be opened consecutively by pressing the button repeatedly.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be selected are set in quotation marks, e.g., "Settings".
Changing between panels Options menu After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a The "Options" menu consists of various areas: new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap. ▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Switch off control ▷ Move the MINI joystick to the left. display". The current panel is closed and the previ‐ ▷ Control options for the selected main ous panel is displayed. menu, e.g., for "Radio". ▷ Move the MINI joystick to the right. ▷ If applicable, further operating options for the selected menu, for instance "Store A new panel is opened on top of the previ‐ station". ous display.
20 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 21
Onboard monitor AT A GLANCE
Changing settings Example: setting the 1. Select a field. clock 2. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired set‐ ting is displayed. Setting the clock
1. Press the button. The main menu is displayed. 2. Turn the MINI joystick until "Settings" is highlighted and press the MINI joystick.
3. Press the MINI joystick to confirm the set‐ ting.
Activating/deactivating the functions Several menu items are preceded by a check‐ box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐ 3. If necessary, move the MINI joystick to the vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item left to display "Time/Date". activates or deactivates the function. 4. Turn the MINI joystick until "Time/Date" is Function is activated. highlighted and press the MINI joystick. The function is deactivated.
5. Turn the MINI joystick to set the hours and press the MINI joystick. 6. Turn the MINI joystick to set the minutes and press the MINI joystick.
Status information
Status field The following information is displayed in the status field at the top right:
21 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 22
AT A GLANCE Onboard monitor
▷ Time. Symbol Meaning ▷ Current entertainment source. USB audio interface. ▷ Sound output, on/off. Music interface for smartphones. ▷ Wireless network reception strength.
▷ Telephone status. Additional symbols ▷ Traffic bulletin reception. Check Control messages and entries using the Symbol Meaning voice activation system temporarily hide the Spoken instructions are switched off. status information.
Status field symbols Entering letters and The symbols are grouped into various catego‐ ries. numbers
Radio symbols General information 1. Turn the MINI joystick: select letters or Symbol Meaning numbers. HD Radio™ is switched on. 2. Select additional letters or numbers if Satellite radio is switched on. needed. 3. "OK": confirm the entry. Telephone symbols
Symbol Meaning Incoming or outgoing call.
Wireless network reception strength Symbol flashes: searching for network.
Wireless network is not available.
Bluetooth is switched on. Symbol Function Roaming is active. Press the MINI joystick: delete the let‐ Text message, e-mail was received. ter or number.
Press the MINI joystick for an ex‐ Entertainment symbols tended period: delete all letters or numbers. Symbol Meaning CD player. Enter a blank space.
AUX-IN port. Switching between letters and numbers Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐ tween entering letters and numbers.
22 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 23
Onboard monitor AT A GLANCE
Symbol Function Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
Switching between upper and lower case letters Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐ tween entering uppercase and lowercase let‐ ters.
Symbol Function Move the MINI joystick forward: switch from upper to lower case letters.
Move the MINI joystick forward: switch from lower to upper case letters.
Entry comparison Entry of names and addresses: the selection is narrowed down every time a letter is entered and letters may be added automatically. The entries are continuously compared to the data stored in the vehicle. ▷ Only those letters are offered during the entry for which data is available. ▷ Destination search: town/city names can be entered using the spelling of language available on the Control Display.
23 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 24
AT A GLANCE Voice activation system
Voice activation system
Vehicle equipment Using voice activation This chapter describes all series equipment as Activating the voice activation system well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series. Therefore, it also 1. Press the button on the steering describes equipment that may not be found in wheel. your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This 2. Wait for the signal. also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ This symbol on the Control Display indi‐ tems. cates that the voice activation system is ac‐ When using the features and systems described tive. here, adhere to local regulations.
The concept ▷ Most functions that are displayed on the Control Display can be operated with the voice activation system using spoken com‐ mands. The system prompts you to make your entries. 3. Say the command. ▷ Functions that can only be used when the vehicle is stationary cannot be operated us‐ The command appears on the Control Dis‐ ing the voice activation system. play. ▷ The system uses a special microphone in If no other commands are available, operate the headliner on the driver's side. the function via the onboard monitor in this case. ▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's Manual to use with the voice activation sys‐ Terminating the voice activation tem. system
Briefly press the button on the steering Requirements wheel or ›Cancel‹. Via the Control Display, set a language that is also supported by the voice activation system so that the spoken commands can be identi‐ Possible commands fied. Most menu items on the Control Display can be Set the language, refer to page 72. voiced as commands. The available commands depend on the menu that is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐ play.
24 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 25
Voice activation system AT A GLANCE
The functions of the main menu have short Example: playing back a commands. CD Some list items, such as the phone book en‐ tries, can also be selected via the voice activa‐ Via the main menu tion system. Say the list items exactly as they are displayed on the list. The commands of the menu items are spoken out loud, in the same way as they are selected Having possible commands read aloud via the MINI joystick. You can have the system read possible com‐ 1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output mands aloud: ›Voice commands‹. if necessary. For example, if the "CD" menu is displayed, the commands for the operating the CD player are 2. Press the button on the steering read out loud. wheel. 3. ›C D and multimedia‹ Executing functions using short The medium last played is played back. commands 4. ›C D‹ Functions on the main menu can be performed directly by means of short commands, usually 5. ›C D drive‹ irrespective of which menu item is currently se‐ The CD is played back. lected, for instance ›Vehicle status‹. List of short commands of the voice activation 6. Press the button on the steering system, refer to page 262. wheel again to select a specific track. 7. ›Track ...‹ e.g., CD track 4. Help dialog for the voice activation system Via short commands Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹ Playback of the CD can also be started using a Additional commands for the help dialog: short command. ▷ ›Help with examples‹: information about 1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output the current operating options and the most if necessary. important commands for them are an‐ nounced. 2. Press the button on the steering ▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: information wheel. about the principle of operation for the 3. ›C D drive Track ...‹ e.g., CD track 4. voice activation system is announced.
Setting the voice dialog You can set whether the system should use the standard dialog or a shorter version. In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the announcements from the system are issued in an abbreviated form.
25 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 26
AT A GLANCE Voice activation system
On the Control Display: ▷ Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system. 1. "Settings" ▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle 2. "Language/Units" while speaking. 3. "Speech mode:" 4. Select the setting.
Adjusting the volume Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐ structions until the desired volume is set. ▷ The volume remains constant even if the volume of other audio sources is changed. ▷ The volume is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Notes on Emergency Re‐ quests Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐ tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐ tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the establishment of a telephone connection.
Environmental condi‐ tions ▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐ sis, and speed.
26 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 27
Voice activation system AT A GLANCE
27 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15
HANDLE ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATION
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 30
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Opening and closing
Vehicle equipment The settings called up and implemented when the vehicle is unlocked depend on which re‐ This chapter describes all series equipment as mote control is used to unlock the vehicle, Per‐ well as country-specific and special equipment sonal Profile, refer to page 30. offered for this model series. Therefore, it also In addition, information about service require‐ describes equipment that may not be found in ments is stored in the remote control, Service your vehicle, for instance due to the selected data in the remote control, refer to page 233. special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ Integrated key tems. When using the features and systems described here, adhere to local regulations.
Remote control/key
Buttons on the remote control
Press button 1 to unlock the key.
The integrated key fits the following locks: ▷ Driver's door, refer to page 34.
New remote controls You can obtain new remote controls from your service center. 1 Opening tailgate 2 Unlocking Loss of the remote controls 3 Locking Lost remote controls can be blocked by your service center.
General information Each remote control contains a rechargeable Personal Profile battery that is automatically recharged when it is in the ignition lock while the car is being The concept driven. Use each remote control at least twice a You can set several of your vehicle's functions year for longer road trips in order to maintain to suit your personal needs and preferences. the batteries' charge status. ▷ Through Personal Profile, most of these set‐ In vehicles equipped with Comfort Access, the tings are stored for the remote control cur‐ remote control contains a replaceable battery, rently in use. refer to page 39.
30 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 31
Opening and closing CONTROLS
▷ While the vehicle is being unlocked, the re‐ ▷ Automatic climate control, refer to mote control is recognized and the settings page 101: AUTO program, activating/deac‐ stored with it are called up and imple‐ tivating the cooling function, setting the mented. temperature, air volume, and air distribu‐ ▷ Your personal settings will be recognized tion. and called up again even if the vehicle has ▷ Entertainment: been used in the meantime by someone ▷ Tone settings, refer to page 154. else with another remote control. ▷ Volume, refer to page 154. ▷ The individual settings are stored for no more than three remote controls. Central locking system Personal Profile settings The following functions and settings can be The concept stored in a profile. The central locking system becomes active More information on the settings can be found when the driver's door is closed. under: The system simultaneously engages and re‐ ▷ Response of the central locking system leases the locks on the following: when the car is being unlocked, refer to ▷ Doors. page 32. ▷ Tailgate. ▷ Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to page 35. ▷ Fuel filler flap. ▷ Triple turn signal activation, refer to page 60. Operating from the outside ▷ Via the remote control. ▷ Settings for the displays on the onboard monitor, in the speedometer, and in the ▷ Via the door lock. tachometer: ▷ In cars with Comfort Access, via the door ▷ 12h/24h clock format, refer to handles on the driver's and front passenger page 71. sides. ▷ Date format, refer to page 72. The following takes place simultaneously when locking/unlocking the vehicle via the remote ▷ Brightness of the Control Display, refer control: to page 73. ▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment, the ▷ Language on the Control Display, refer anti-theft protection is switched on and off to page 72. as well. The anti-theft protection makes it ▷ Units of measure for fuel consumption, impossible to unlock the doors using the distance covered/remaining distances, lock buttons or door handles. and temperature, refer to page 71. ▷ The welcome lamps, interior lamps, and ▷ Light settings: ambient lighting are switched on and off. ▷ Headlamp courtesy delay feature, refer ▷ The alarm system is armed or disarmed, re‐ to page 78. fer to page 39. ▷ Daytime running lights, refer to page 78.
31 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 32
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Operating from the inside The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ Via the switch/button for the central locking rently in use. system, refer to page 34. 1. "Settings" In an accident of the necessary severity, the central locking system unlocks automatically. The hazard warning system and interior lamps come on.
Opening and closing: from the outside
Using the remote control 2. "Door locks" 3. "Unlock button" General information Take the remote control with you People or animals left unattended in a parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐ side. Always take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside.◀
Unlocking 4. Select the desired function: Press the button. The vehicle is un‐ ▷ "All doors" locked. The welcome lamps and interior lamps are Press the button once: the en‐ switched on. tire vehicle unlocks. You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked. ▷ "Driver's door only"
Pressing the button once un‐ locks only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap. Pressing twice unlocks the entire vehicle.
Convenient opening
Press and hold the button on the re‐ mote control. The power windows are opened. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the glass sunroof is raised.
32 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 33
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Convenient closing with the remote control is Malfunctions not possible. The function of the remote control may be im‐ paired by local radio waves. If this occurs, un‐ Locking lock and lock the vehicle at the door lock with the integrated key. Press the button. If it should become impossible to lock the vehi‐ Locking from the outside cle with a remote control, the battery in the re‐ Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if mote control is discharged. Use this remote there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be control on an extended trip to recharge the unlocked from inside without special knowl‐ battery, refer to page 30. edge.◀ For US owners only Setting the confirmation signals The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Have unlocking or locking of the vehicle con‐ Commission regulations. Operation is governed firmed. by the following: 1. "Settings" FCC ID: 2. "Door locks" LX8766S 3. "Flash when lock/unlock" LX8766E LX8CAS Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐ ence, and ▷ this device must accept any interference re‐ 4. Press the MINI joystick. ceived, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Switching on the interior lamps Any unauthorized modifications or changes to When the vehicle is locked: these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. Press the button. You can also use this function to locate your ve‐ hicle in parking garages, etc.
Unlocking the tailgate
Press the button for approx. 1 second and then release it.
33 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 34
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Using the door lock Opening/closing Turn the key to the unlock or lock position and hold it there. Keep the closing area clear Watch during the opening and closing process to be sure that no one becomes trap‐ ped. Releasing the key stops the motion.◀
Manual operation Sets how the vehicle is to be unlocked, refer to If an electrical malfunction occurs, the driver's page 32. door can be unlocked or locked by turning the integrated key to the end positions of the door In some vehicle equipment versions, only the lock. driver's door can be unlocked and locked via the door lock. Locking from the outside Opening and closing: Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if from the inside there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be Operation via unlocked from inside without special knowl‐ edge.◀ ▷ Switch in the center console:
Unlocking the doors and tailgate at once To lock all doors, the fuel filler flap, and the tail‐ gate at once:
1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle us‐ ing the button for the central locking sys‐ tem in the interior, refer to page 34.
2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas‐ ▷ Button in the driver's or front passenger senger door, refer to page 35. door: 3. To lock the vehicle: ▷ Lock the driver's door using the integrated key in the door lock, or ▷ Press down the lock button of the front passenger door and close the door from the outside.
Convenient opening and closing In vehicles with an alarm system or Comfort Ac‐ cess, the windows and the glass sunroof can be The graphic shows the button in the MINI Pace‐ operated via the door lock. man as an example.
34 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 35
Opening and closing CONTROLS
The switch or the buttons can be used to lock or unlock the doors and tailgate when the doors are closed, but they are not theft-pro‐ tected. The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Unlocking and opening doors ▷ Using the switch or the buttons for the cen‐ tral locking system, unlock all of the doors at once and then pull the door opener above the armrest, or Take the remote control with you ▷ Pull the door handle on each door twice: People or animals left unattended in a the door is unlocked the first time and parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐ opened the second time. side. Always take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle Locking can then be opened from the outside.◀ ▷ Press the switch/button or ▷ Push down the lock button of a door. To avoid locking yourself out by accident, the Tailgate driver's door cannot be locked at the lock button while the door is open. Opening The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens. Automatic locking Ensure that adequate clearance is available be‐ In addition, it is possible to set the situations in fore opening. which the vehicle locks. The setting is stored for the remote control in use. Provide edge protection
1. "Settings" Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear window while driving and damage the heating 2. "Door locks" wires of the rear window. Provide edge protec‐ 3. Select a menu item: tion.◀ ▷ "Lock if no door is opened" Only drive with the tailgate fully closed; other‐ The central locking system locks after a wise, the tail lamps will be hidden from view short period if no door is opened. and driving safety will be compromised. ▷ "Lock after start. to drive" In some market-specific versions, the tailgate The central locking system locks when can only be unlocked using the remote control you start driving. if the vehicle was unlocked first.
35 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 36
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Opening from the inside Press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second and release. The tailgate is unlocked.
Closing Keep the closing area clear Make sure that the closing area of the tailgate is clear; otherwise, injuries or damage may result.◀ Press the button on the driver's footwell. Take the remote control with you MINI Countryman Always take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle and do not place it in the cargo area; otherwise, the remote control may be locked into the vehicle when the tail‐ gate is closed.◀
Move the cover into position When closing, ensure that the cargo cover is resting on the rubber buffers of the securing straps; otherwise, damage may occur when closing the tailgate.◀ Press the top half of the MINI emblem, arrow, or MINI Countryman
Press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second and release. The tailgate is unlocked.
MINI Paceman
Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tailgate can be used to conveniently pull down the tail‐ gate.
Press the top half of the MINI emblem, arrow, or
36 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 37
Opening and closing CONTROLS
MINI Paceman Comparison with ordinary remote control The functions can be controlled by pressing the buttons or via Comfort Access. Notes on opening and closing, refer to page 30. If you notice a brief delay while opening or closing the windows or glass sunroof, the sys‐ tem is checking whether a remote control is in‐ side the vehicle. Repeat the opening or closing procedure, if necessary. Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tailgate can be used to conveniently pull down the tail‐ Unlocking gate.
Comfort Access
The concept The vehicle can be accessed without activating the remote control. All you need to do is to have the remote control with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket. The vehicle automatically de‐ Press button 1. tects the remote control when it is nearby or in Depending on the setting, either only the driv‐ the passenger compartment. er's door or the entire vehicle is unlocked, refer Comfort Access supports the following func‐ to page 32. tions: Pressing the button again locks the entire vehi‐ ▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle. cle again. ▷ Unlocking of the tailgate separately. Convenient opening with the remote control, ▷ Starting the engine. refer to page 32.
Functional requirements Locking ▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐ Press button 1. ence in the vicinity. For Convenient closing, press and hold but‐ ▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control ton 1. must be located outside of the vehicle. The windows and, if applicable, the glass sun‐ ▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not roof are closed in addition. possible until after approx. 2 seconds. ▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐ Unlocking the tailgate separately mote control is inside the vehicle. Press the top half of the MINI emblem. ▷ The doors and tailgate must be closed to This corresponds to pressing the following but‐ operate the windows. ton on the remote control: .
37 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 38
CONTROLS Opening and closing
If a remote control accidentally left in the cargo Before driving a vehicle with Steptronic area is detected in the locked vehicle after the transmission into a car wash tailgate is closed, the tailgate opens again 1. Insert the remote control into the ignition slightly. The hazard warning system flashes and switch. an acoustic signal sounds. 2. Depress the brake pedal. Power windows and electrical glass 3. Move the selector lever to position N. sunroof 4. Switch the engine off. When the engine is switched off, the windows The vehicle can roll. and the sunroof can be operated as long as neither the doors nor the tailgate are opened. Malfunction When the door and tailgate are closed again The Comfort Access functions can be disturbed and the remote control is detected inside the by local radio waves, such as by a mobile vehicle, the windows and the sunroof can be phone in the immediate vicinity of the remote operated again. control or when a mobile phone is being Insert the remote control into the ignition lock charged in the vehicle. to be able to operate the windows and the sun‐ If this occurs, open or close the vehicle using roof while the engine is switched off and the the buttons on the remote control or use the doors are open. integrated key in the door lock. To start the engine afterward, insert the remote Switching on the radio ready state control into the ignition switch. Press the Start/Stop button to switch on the radio ready state, refer to page 57. Warning lights Do not depress the brake or the clutch; other‐ The warning light in the instrument wise, the engine will start. cluster lights up when you attempt to start the engine: the engine cannot be Starting the engine started. The engine can be started or the ignition can The remote control is not in the vehicle or has a be switched on, refer to page 57, when a re‐ malfunction. Take the remote control with you mote control is inside the vehicle. It is not nec‐ inside the vehicle or have it checked. If neces‐ essary to insert a remote control into the igni‐ sary, insert another remote control into the ig‐ tion lock. nition switch.
Switching off the engine in cars with The warning lamp in the instrument Steptronic transmission cluster lights up while the engine is run‐ The engine can only be switched off with the ning: the remote control is no longer in‐ selector lever in position P, refer to page 64. side the vehicle. To switch off the engine with the selector lever After switching off the engine, the engine can in position N, the remote control must be in‐ only be started again within approx. 10 sec‐ serted in the ignition lock. onds if no door has been opened.
The indicator lamp lights up and a mes‐ sage appears on the Control Display: re‐ place the remote control battery.
38 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 39
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Replacing the battery Arming and disarming the alarm system The remote control for Comfort Access contains a battery that will need to be replaced from General information time to time. When the vehicle is locked and unlocked, the alarm system is armed and disarmed at the 1. Remove the cover. same time.
Door lock and armed alarm system Unlocking via the door lock will trigger the alarm on some market-specific versions. To stop this alarm, unlock the vehicle with the remote control or switch on the ignition.
Tailgate with armed alarm system The tailgate, refer to page 33, can also be 2. Insert a new battery with the positive side opened when the alarm system is armed. facing upwards. 3. Press the cover closed. Press the button on the remote con‐ Return used battery to a recycling center trol. or to your service center. When you subsequently close the tailgate, it is again locked and monitored. Unlocking via the door lock will trigger the Alarm system alarm on some market-specific versions. Switching off the alarm The concept ▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote con‐ The enabled alarm system reacts to the follow‐ trol, refer to page 32. ing: ▷ Insert the remote control all the way into ▷ Opening of a door, the hood or the tailgate. the ignition lock. ▷ Movements inside the vehicle. ▷ With Comfort Access and if you are carrying ▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at‐ the remote control with you, push the but‐ tempts to steal a wheel or tow the car. ton on the door lock. ▷ Interruptions in battery voltage. Depending on the market-specific version, the Display on the tachometer alarm system briefly signals unauthorized entry When the alarm system is being armed, all LEDs attempts by: pulse like a heartbeat. One LED flashes after ▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm. approx. 16 minutes. ▷ By switching on the hazard warning system.
39 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 40
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Interior motion sensor For the interior motion sensor to function prop‐ erly, the windows and the glass sunroof must be closed.
Avoiding unintentional alarms The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor can be switched off together, such as in the fol‐ lowing situations: ▷ LEDs pulse or LED flashes: system is armed. ▷ In duplex garages. ▷ One LED flashes at short intervals: the ▷ During transport on car-carrying trains, at doors, hood, or tailgate is not properly sea or on a trailer. closed. ▷ When animals are to remain in the vehicle. Even if these are not closed fully, the re‐ maining items are locked and the LEDs Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and pulse after approx. 10 seconds for approx. interior motion sensor 16 minutes; afterwards, one LED flashes. The interior motion sensor is not activated. ▷ Press the button on the remote ▷ The LEDs go out after the vehicle is un‐ control twice in succession. locked: the vehicle has not been tampered ▷ Lock the vehicle twice with the integrated with in the meantime. key. ▷ The LEDs flash after the vehicle is unlocked The LEDs flash in short succession for approx. until the remote control is inserted in the 2 seconds. The tilt alarm sensor and interior ignition, but for no longer than approx. motion sensor remain switched off until the ve‐ 5 minutes: the vehicle has been tampered hicle is unlocked and locked again. with in the meantime.
Panic mode Glass sunroof, electrical You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation. General information Danger of pinching Press the button on the remote control for at least two seconds. Monitor the closing process and make sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is To switch off the alarm: press any button on the clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ remote control. Take the remote control with you Tilt alarm sensor Take the remote control with you when The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐ The alarm system responds in situations such as ple, cannot operate the roof and injure them‐ attempts to steal a wheel or tow the car. selves.◀ Convenient operation via: ▷ Door lock, refer to page 34
40 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 41
Opening and closing CONTROLS
▷ Comfort Access, refer to page 37 The same method is used to close the glass sunroof, in this case by pressing the switch for‐ ward. The front glass sunroof remains in the raised position. The rear glass sunroof is raised. Press‐ ing again closes both sunroofs completely. MINI Paceman: ▷ In the raised position with the ignition switched on, press the switch back and hold. The front glass sunroof is opened. Tilting the glass sunroof Releasing stops the motion. MINI Countryman: The same method is used to close the glass ▷ Press the switch back to the resistance sunroof, in this case by pressing the switch for‐ point and hold. ward. Both glass sunroofs are raised. The front glass sunroof remains in the raised Releasing stops the motion. position. Pressing again closes the roof com‐ ▷ With the ignition switched on, press the pletely. switch back past the resistance point. Both closed glass sunroofs are raised fully. Roller sunblind Pressing again stops the motion. The roller sunblind can be opened and closed separately from the glass sunroof. MINI Paceman: ▷ Press the switch back to the resistance After a power failure point and hold. After a power failure, it could happen that the The front glass sunroof is raised. sunroof can only be raised. In this case, have Releasing stops the motion. the system initialized. The manufacturer of your ▷ With the ignition switched on, press the MINI recommends having this work performed switch back past the resistance point. by the service center. The front glass sunroof is fully raised. Pressing again stops the motion. Power windows
Opening, closing General information MINI Countryman: Danger of pinching ▷ In the raised position with the ignition Monitor the closing process and make switched on, press the switch back and sure that the closing path of the window is hold. clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ The front glass sunroof is opened. The rear glass sunroof is closed. Releasing stops the motion.
41 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 42
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Take the remote control with you MINI Countryman: rear windows Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐ ple, cannot operate the power windows and in‐ jure themselves.◀ If, after having been opened and closed a num‐ ber of times in close succession, a window can only be closed, the system is overheated. Let the system cool down for several minutes with the ignition switched on or the engine running. To open: Opening, closing ▷ Press the switch to the resistance point. The window opens while the switch is held. Front windows ▷ Press the switch beyond the resistance point. The window opens automatically in the radio ready state and higher. To close: ▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point. The window closes while the switch is held. ▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance point. The window closes automatically. Pressing the switch stops the motion. To open: ▷ Press the switch to the resistance point. The After the ignition is switched off window opens while the switch is held. The windows can be operated for approx. 1 mi‐ ▷ Press the switch beyond the resistance nute after the remote control is removed or the point. The window opens automatically in ignition is switched off. the radio ready state and higher. Take the remote control with you Press again briefly to stop the opening pro‐ Take the remote control with you when cedure. leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐ To close: ple, cannot operate the power windows and in‐ ▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point. The jure themselves.◀ window closes while the switch is held. ▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance point. Pinch protection system The window closes automatically. If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a Pressing the switch stops the motion. window closes, the closing action is inter‐ rupted. The window reopens slightly.
42 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 43
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐ MINI Countryman: safety switch tection Even with the pinch protection system, check that the window's closing path is clear; other‐ wise, the closing action may not stop in certain situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀
Do not use window accessories Do not install any accessories in the range of movement of the windows; otherwise, the pinch protection system will be impaired.◀ With the safety switch, the rear windows are prevented from being opened or closed via the Closing without the pinch protection switches in the rear passenger area, such as by system children. Danger of pinching Press the button. The LED lights up if the safety Monitor the closing process and make function is switched on. sure that the closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ Safety switch for rear operation Press the safety switch when transporting If there is an external danger or, for example, if children in the rear; otherwise, injury may result ice on the windows prevents a window from if the windows are closed without supervi‐ closing normally, the window can be closed sion.◀ manually.
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there. Pinch protection is limited and the window reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value. 2. Pull the switch past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there. The window closes without pinch protec‐ tion.
43 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 44
CONTROLS Adjusting
Adjusting
Vehicle equipment safety belt in an accident. This would eliminate the protection normally provided by the belt.◀ This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment Front seat adjustment offered for this model series. Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in Forward/backward your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using the features and systems described here, adhere to local regulations.
Sitting safely The ideal seating position can make a vital con‐ Pull the lever, arrow 1, and slide the seat into tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. the desired position, arrows 2. The seating position plays an important role in After releasing the lever, move the seat forward an accident in combination with: or back slightly to make sure it engages prop‐ ▷ Safety belts, refer to page 46 erly. ▷ Head restraints, refer to page 48. ▷ Airbags, refer to page 81. Height
Seats
Note before adjusting Do not adjust the seat while driving Never attempt to adjust the driver's seat while driving. The seat could respond with un‐ expected movement and the ensuing loss of Pull the lever up or push it down repeatedly, ar‐ vehicle control could lead to an accident.◀ rows 1, until the desired height is reached, ar‐ Do not incline the backrest too far to the rows . rear Do not incline the backrest on the front passen‐ Backrest ger side too far to the rear during driving. Oth‐ MINI Countryman: erwise, there is the danger of sliding under the
44 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 45
Adjusting CONTROLS
Pull the lever, arrow 1, and apply your weight The graphic shows the MINI Countryman as an to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary. example. Turn the wheel to increase or decrease the cur‐ MINI Paceman: vature.
MINI Countryman: rear seat adjustment Observe the following when adjusting Do not adjust the rear seats during a trip; otherwise, there is a risk of passenger injury. Make sure that the locking mechanisms of the rear seats engage properly. Otherwise the re‐ straining effect of the safety belts during an ac‐ Pull the lever, arrow 1, and apply your weight cident could be reduced.◀ to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary, ar‐ rows 2. Forward/backward
Lumbar support You can also adjust the contour of the backrest to obtain additional support in the lumbar re‐ gion. The upper hips and spinal column receive sup‐ plementary support to help you maintain a re‐ laxed, upright sitting position.
Pull the lever and slide the seat into the desired position. Release the lever and move the seat slightly forward or back so that it engages properly.
Backrest Adjust the backrest tilt, refer to page 111.
45 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 46
CONTROLS Adjusting
Seat heating The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be correct for adult seat occupants of every build if the seat is correctly adjusted. One person per safety belt Never allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or small children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀
Putting on the belt Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly across the lap and shoulders, as close to the Switching on body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies The temperature setting progresses one step low around the hips in the lap area and does through its control sequence each time you not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt press the button. The maximum temperature is can slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal reached when three LEDs are lit. impact and injure the abdomen. If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐ The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rub nutes, the seat heating is activated automati‐ on sharp edges, be routed over solid or breaka‐ cally with the temperature set last. ble objects, or be pinched.◀
The temperature is reduced, if need be, down Reduction of restraining effect to no heat in order to reduce the load on the battery. The LEDs remain lit. Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the belt from fitting properly, and pull the shoulder Switching off belt periodically to readjust the tension across your lap; otherwise, the retention effect of the Press the button longer. safety belt may be reduced.◀
Safety belts Buckling the belt MINI Countryman: Number of safety belts Your vehicle has been fitted with four or five safety belts for the safety of you and your pas‐ sengers. However, they can only offer protection when adjusted correctly.
Notes Always make sure that safety belts are being MINI Paceman: worn by all occupants before driving away. Although airbags enhance safety by providing added protection, they are not a substitute for safety belts.
46 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 47
Adjusting CONTROLS
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in 1 Opening for the safety belt the belt buckle. 2 Holder for the small buckle tongue The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be correct for adult seat occupants of every build if Take the small buckle tongue out of the holder. the seat is correctly adjusted, refer to page 44. Move both buckle tongues downward.
Unbuckling the belt Closing 1. Hold the belt firmly. 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. 3. Guide the belt back into its reel.
Securing the buckle tongues If the front passenger seat is not occupied, slide the buckle tongue up to the belt stop knob with the clip. When the outer rear seats are not occupied, the Insert the small buckle tongue 2 of the safety buckle tongues of the rear seats can be slid up belt into the small belt buckle 3. to the cargo area trim with the clip. This helps avoid annoying noises when driving. Opening MINI Countryman: center safety belt of Press the red button on the small belt buckle 3 rear seat with buckle tongue 1. The belt buckle embossed with the word CEN‐ When the center safety belt is locked: TER is intended exclusively for use by passen‐ Press the red button 3 with the buckle tongue gers riding in the center position. of the outer left safety belt. If the center safety belt in the rear is used, the backrests must be locked, refer to page 112. The safety belt will not have a restraining effect if the backrest is not locked.
Belt holder in the headliner The holder for the safety belt is located in the headliner.
47 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 48
CONTROLS Adjusting
Putting on the belt Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front passenger seat The indicator lamps light up and a sig‐ nal sounds. In addition, a message ap‐ pears on the Control Display. Check whether the safety belt has been fas‐ tened correctly.
Damage to safety belts In the case of strain caused by accidents or 1 Large buckle tongue damage: 2 Small buckle tongue Have the safety belts, including the safety belt 3 Small belt buckle tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors checked. 4 Large belt buckle Checking and replacing safety belts Buckle tongue 1 must be inserted in belt Have the work performed only by your buckle 4. Make sure you hear the buckle service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured tongue engage in the belt buckle. that this safety feature will function properly.◀ Insert the buckle tongue into the belt buckle in such a way that the belt lies smoothly against the body of the buckled person and is not twisted. Head restraints
Stowing the center safety belt Correctly set head restraint If the center seat is not occupied, insert the belt A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the buckles 3 and 4 into the respective holders, ar‐ risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident. rows. Adjusting the head restraint Correctly adjust the head restraints of all occupied seats; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in an accident.◀
Height Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approx. at ear level. MINI Countryman: the center rear head re‐ straint is not height adjustable. Move the buckle tongues to the belt holder on the headliner, refer to page 47, and insert them into the provided holders.
48 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 49
Adjusting CONTROLS
Height adjustment MINI Paceman: fold the backrest forward if necessary. 3. Press button 1 and pull out the head re‐ straint all the way to the stop. MINI Countryman: additionally press but‐ ton 2 using a suitable tool. 4. Pull out the head restraint. 5. Fold back the backrest.
Rear To raise: pull. 1. Pull the head restraint upward as far as To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push possible. the head restraint down until it engages. 2. Fold the backrest forward slightly. MINI Countryman: additionally press button 2 3. Press button 1 and pull out the head re‐ on the rear head restraints only if you wish to straint all the way to the stop. remove them. MINI Countryman: additionally press but‐ ton 2 using a suitable tool. Removing 4. Pull out the head restraint completely. Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question. 5. Fold back the rear seat backrest. Before transporting passengers Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐ Mirrors porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐ tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐ Exterior mirrors able.◀ General information The mirror on the passenger side is more curved than the driver's mirror. Estimating distances correctly Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear. Do not estimate the distance to the traffic behind you based on what you see in the mirror, as this will increase your risk of an accident.◀ Front 1. Pull the head restraint upward as far as possible. 2. MINI Countryman: tilt the backrest back slightly.
49 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 50
CONTROLS Adjusting
At a glance Fold in the mirror in a car wash Before entering an automatic car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the button; otherwise, they could be damaged, de‐ pending on the width of the vehicle.◀
Automatic heating Both exterior mirrors are heated automatically while the engine is running or the ignition is switched on when the external temperature is 1 Adjusting below a certain value. 2 Selecting the left/right mirror Interior rearview mirror 3 Folding the mirror in and out
Selecting a mirror To change to the other mirror: slide the mirror switch over.
Adjusting electrically The setting corresponds to the direction in which the button is pressed. To reduce the blinding effect from the rear when driving at night: turn the knob. Adjusting manually If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example, Interior rearview and exterior mirrors, press the edges of the mirror glass. automatic dimming feature
Folding the mirror in and out Press button 3. The mirror can be folded in up to a vehicle speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. For example, this is advantageous ▷ In car washes. ▷ In narrow streets. ▷ For folding back mirrors that were folded Two photocells are used for control: away manually. ▷ In the mirror frame, see arrow. ▷ On the back of the mirror.
For proper operation: ▷ Keep the photocells clean.
50 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 51
Adjusting CONTROLS
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside rearview mirror and the windshield. ▷ Do not apply stickers to the windshield in front of the mirror.
Steering wheel
Adjusting Do not adjust while driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement could result in an accident.◀ 1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seating posi‐ tion. 3. Fold the lever back. Do not use force to swing the lever back. Do not use force to swing the lever back up; otherwise, the mechanism will be dam‐ aged.◀
51 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 52
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
Transporting children safely
Vehicle equipment Installing child seats Only install child seats in the rear when This chapter describes all series equipment as the rear seat backrest is folded all the way back well as country-specific and special equipment and engaged; otherwise, there is an increased offered for this model series. Therefore, it also risk of injury in an accident.◀ describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This Children on the front passenger seat also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. Front passenger airbags Should it be necessary to use a child restraint When using the features and systems described fixing system on the front passenger seat, here, adhere to local regulations. make sure that the front and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated, refer The right place for chil‐ to page 82. dren Deactivating the front passenger airbags If a child restraint fixing system is used in Notes the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there Children in the vehicle is an increased risk of injury to the child when Do not leave children unattended in the the airbags are triggered, even with a child re‐ vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐ straint fixing system.◀ selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the doors.◀ Installing child re‐ Children should always be in the rear straint fixing systems Accident research shows that the safest place for children is on the rear seat. Before mounting Transporting children in the rear MINI Countryman: before mounting a child re‐ Transport children younger than 13 years straint fixing system on the rear seats, move of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in the rear the seats into the rearmost positions. only, using child restraint fixing systems suita‐ Adjust the inclination of the center backrest to ble for the age, weight, and height of the child; that of the respective outer backrest. otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in After mounting the child restraint fixing system an accident. on the respective outer rear seat, adjust the Children 13 years of age or older must wear a backrest forward, if necessary, to ensure that safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint the backrest is in contact with the child re‐ fixing system can no longer be used, due to straint fixing system. Rear seat backrests, refer their age, weight and size.◀ to page 111.
52 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 53
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
Notes Child seat security Manufacturer's information for child re‐ straint fixing systems To select, mount and use child restraint fixing systems, observe the information provided by the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro‐ tective effect can be impaired.◀
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating the airbags The graphic shows the MINI Countryman as an example. After installing a child restraint fixing system on the front passenger seat, ensure that the front, The rear safety belts and the safety belt for the side, and knee airbags on the front passenger front passenger can be locked to prevent ex‐ side are deactivated. tension in order to permit attachment of child restraint fixing systems. Deactivating the front passenger airbags If a child restraint fixing system is used in To lock the safety belt the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there 1. Secure the child restraint fixing system with is an increased risk of injury to the child when the belt. the airbags are triggered, even with a child re‐ 2. Pull out the belt webbing completely. straint fixing system.◀ 3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and pull it taut against the child restraint fixing Seat position and height system. Before installing a child restraint fixing system, The safety belt is locked. move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and adjust its height to the highest po‐ To unlock the safety belt sition to obtain the best possible position for 1. Open the belt buckle. the belt and to offer optimal protection in the event of an accident. 2. Remove the child restraint fixing system. Do not change this seat position once it has 3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com‐ been set. pletely. Center safety belt: unlock belt buckle 3 in addition, refer to page 48. Guide the safety belt to the holder on the headliner.
LATCH child restraint fix‐ ing system LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children.
53 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 54
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
Notes MINI Paceman Manufacturer's information for LATCH child restraint fixing systems To mount and use the LATCH child restraint fix‐ ing systems, observe the operating and safety information from the system manufacturer; otherwise, the level of protection may be re‐ duced.◀
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors The mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are The lower anchors may be used to attach the located at the points indicated by the arrows. CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child is The corresponding symbol shows the restrained by the internal harnesses. mounts for the lower LATCH anchors. Correctly engage the lower LATCH an‐ chors Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have properly engaged and that the child restraint fixing system is resting snugly against the back‐ Mounting LATCH child restraint fixing rest; otherwise, the degree of protection of‐ systems fered may be reduced.◀ 1. Mount the child restraint fixing system; re‐ fer to the operating instructions of the sys‐ Before installing the child seat, pull the belt out tem. of the area for the child restraint fixing system. 2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐ MINI Countryman erly connected.
Child restraint fixing systems with an upper re‐ taining strap
Mounting points LATCH mounting points The mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are Only use the mounting points for the up‐ located at the points indicated by the arrows. per LATCH retaining strap to secure child re‐ straint systems; otherwise, the mounting points could be damaged.◀
54 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 55
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
MINI Countryman Outer seats:
There are two additional mounting points for 1 Direction of travel child restraint fixing systems with an upper re‐ 2 Head restraint taining strap, arrows. 3 Cargo area floor 4 Hook for upper retaining strap MINI Paceman 5 Mounting point 6 Backrest 7 Upper retaining strap of child restraint fix‐ ing system
MINI Countryman, center seat
There are two additional mounting points for child restraint fixing systems with an upper re‐ taining strap, arrows.
Guide of the upper LATCH retaining strap Retaining strap 1 Direction of travel Make sure the upper retaining strap does 2 Head restraint not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as 3 Hook for upper retaining strap it passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, the 4 Mounting point strap will not properly secure the child restraint 5 Cargo area floor fixing system in the event of an accident.◀ 6 Backrest 7 Upper retaining strap of child restraint fix‐ ing system
55 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 56
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
Attaching the upper retaining strap to the mounting point 1. Slide the head restraint upward. 2. Center seat: fold the cargo area floor for‐ ward. 3. Guide the upper retaining strap between the supports of the head restraint. 4. Attach the upper retaining strap to the mounting point with the hook. 5. Slide the head restraint into the bottom po‐ sition. 6. Pull the upper retaining strap taut.
MINI Countryman: lock‐ ing doors and windows
Rear doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors down. The door can now be opened from the outside only.
Safety switch for power window This locks the rear window switches so that the windows cannot be operated from the rear. Press the safety switch, refer to page 43.
56 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 57
Driving CONTROLS
Driving
Vehicle equipment Before removing the remote control, push it all the way in to release the locking mechanism. This chapter describes all series equipment as The ignition is switched off if it was on. well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series. Therefore, it also Steptronic transmission describes equipment that may not be found in You can only take out the remote control if your vehicle, for instance due to the selected transmission position P is engaged: interlock. special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using the features and systems described Start/Stop button here, adhere to local regulations.
Ignition lock
Insert the remote control into the ignition lock
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ig‐ nition on or off and starts the engine.
The engine starts when the Start/Stop button is pressed and: ▷ Manual transmission: the clutch pedal is de‐ pressed. ▷ Steptronic transmission: the brake pedal is Insert the remote control all the way into the depressed. ignition lock.
Radio ready state is switched on. Individual Radio ready state electrical consumers can operate. Individual electrical consumers can operate. Radio ready state is switched off automatically: Removing the remote control from the ignition lock ▷ When the remote control is removed from the ignition lock. Do not forcibly pull the remote control ▷ With Comfort Access, refer to page 37, by out of the ignition lock pressing the button on the door handle or Do not forcibly pull the remote control out of the ignition lock as this may cause damage.◀ the button on the remote control. ▷ After a certain period of time.
57 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 58
CONTROLS Driving
Ignition on Frequent starting in quick succession All electrical consumers can operate. Most indi‐ Avoid repeated futile attempts at starting cator and warning lights light up for different the car and avoid starting the car frequently in lengths of time. quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel is not To save battery power when the engine is off, burned or is inadequately burned, and there is switch off the ignition and any unnecessary the danger of overheating and damaging the electronic systems/power consumers. catalytic converter.◀ Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while Radio ready state and ignition off the vehicle remains stationary; start driving All indicator and warning lights in the displays right away, but at moderate engine speeds. go out. Do not depress the accelerator when starting The ignition switches off automatically when the engine. the driver's door is opened. Pressing the Start/ Stop button again switches the ignition back Starting the engine on. For example, the ignition is not switched off in the following situations: ▷ Depress the clutch or brake pedal. ▷ The low beams are switched on.
Starting the engine
General information Manual transmission Enclosed areas Remote control in the ignition lock or with Do not let the engine run in enclosed Comfort Access inside the vehicle, refer to areas; otherwise, breathing of exhaust fumes page 37. may lead to loss of consciousness and death. 1. Depress the brake pedal. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀ 2. Depress the clutch pedal. 3. Press the Start/Stop button. Unattended vehicle The ignition is activated automatically for a cer‐ Do not leave the car unattended with the tain time and is stopped as soon as the engine engine running; otherwise, it presents a poten‐ starts. tial source of danger. Before leaving the car with the engine running, Steptronic transmission shift to neutral or engage transmission posi‐ Remote control in the ignition lock or, with tion P and set the parking brake firmly; other‐ Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to wise, the vehicle may begin to roll.◀ page 37. 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Move the selector lever to position P or N.
58 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 59
Driving CONTROLS
3. Press the Start/Stop button. Steptronic transmission The ignition is activated automatically for a cer‐ 1. Engage transmission position P with the ve‐ tain time and is stopped as soon as the engine hicle stopped. starts. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. 3. Set the parking brake firmly. Engine stop 4. Remove the remote control from the igni‐ tion lock. General information Take the remote control with you Parking brake Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐ The concept ple, cannot operate the windows and injure The parking brake is primarily intended to pre‐ themselves.◀ vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it Set the parking brake and further secure brakes the rear wheels. the vehicle as required Also follow the instructions under Switching off Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐ the engine, refer to page 59. erwise, the vehicle may roll. On steep upward and downward inclines, further secure the ve‐ Setting hicle, for example, by turning the steering The lever engages automatically. wheel in the direction of the curb.◀ Releasing Before driving into a car wash To make it possible for the vehicle to roll in an automatic car wash, follow the information on Washing in automatic car washes, refer to page 250.
Switching off the engine
Manual transmission 1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the Pull up slightly, press the button, and lower the Start/Stop button. lever. 2. Shift into first gear or reverse. 3. Set the parking brake firmly. Notes 4. Remove the remote control from the igni‐ Using the parking brake while driving tion lock. If it should become necessary to use the parking brake while driving, do not pull the parking brake too forcefully. Keep the button on the parking brake lever pressed at all times.
59 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 60
CONTROLS Driving
Excessive application of the parking brake can 2. "Lighting" block the rear wheels and lead to fishtailing of 3. "Triple turn signal" the vehicle.◀ The brake lights do not light up when the park‐ ing brake is pulled.
Turn signal, high-beams, headlight flasher
The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use.
Washer/wiper system
Notes
1 Turn signal Do not switch on the wipers if frozen 2 Switching on the high-beams Do not switch on the wipers if they are frozen onto the windshield; otherwise, the 3 Switching off the high-beams/headlight wiper blades and the windshield wiper motor flasher may be damaged.◀
Turn signal Do not use the wipers on a dry windshield Press the lever beyond the resistance point. Do not use the wipers on a dry wind‐ shield; otherwise, the wiper blades may wear To switch off manually, press the lever to the more rapidly or become damaged.◀ resistance point. Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp At a glance indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
Signaling a turn briefly Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash.
Triple turn signal activation Press the lever to the resistance point. The turn signal flashes three times. 1 Switching on wipers This function can be activated or deactivated: 2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe 1. "Settings"
60 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 61
Driving CONTROLS
3 Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes the rain sensor Deactivate the rain sensor when passing 4 Cleaning the windshield and headlights through an automatic car wash; otherwise, damage could be caused by undesired wiper activation.◀ Switching on wipers Press the wiper lever upward, arrow 1. Activating intermittent wipe or rain The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐ sensor sition when released. Press the button, arrow 3.
Normal wiper speed The symbol is shown in the tachometer. Press up once. The system switches to operation in the inter‐ mittent mode when the vehicle is stationary. Setting the sensitivity of the rain sensor 1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 58. Fast wiper speed 2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever Press up twice or press once beyond the resist‐ repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed. ance point. The system switches to normal speed when the vehicle is stationary.
Switching off wipers or brief wipe Press the wiper lever down, arrow 2. The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐ sition when released. ▷ Brief wipe: press down once. 3. Press and hold the button until the display ▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down changes. once. 4. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐ ▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice. bol and "SET" are displayed. Intermittent wipe or rain sensor If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the intermittent-wipe time is a preset. If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the time between wipes is controlled automatically and depends on the intensity of the rainfall. The rain sensor is mounted on the windshield, directly in front of the interior rearview mirror.
61 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 62
CONTROLS Driving
5. Press and hold the button until the display Do not use the washing facilities when changes. the hood is open Only use the washing facilities when the hood is fully locked; otherwise, the headlamp washer system may become damaged.◀
Windshield washer nozzles The windshield washer nozzles are heated au‐ tomatically while the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.
6. Press the button to select the desired sensi‐ Rear window wiper tivity. 7. Wait or hold the button until the display changes. The settings were stored.
Deactivating intermittent wipe or rain sensor Press the button again, arrow 3.
Cleaning the windshield and headlights 0 Resting position Pull the lever, arrow 4. 1 Switching on intermittent wipe The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐ Turn the cap to level 1. shield and activates the wipers briefly. When reverse gear is engaged, the system When the vehicle lighting system is switched switches to continuous operation. on, the headlights are cleaned at regular and 2 Cleaning the rear window with intermittent appropriate intervals. wipe Do not use the washer system at freezing Turn the cap further to level 2 and hold. temperatures 3 Cleaning the rear window in the resting po‐ Do not use the washers if there is any danger sition that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth‐ Turn the cap to level 3 and hold. erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this reason, use antifreeze. The rear window wiper does not move if the Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is cap is in position 1 before the ignition is empty; otherwise, you could damage the switched on. pump.◀ To switch on the rear window wiper: 1. Move the cap to its basic position. 2. Select the required position again.
62 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 63
Driving CONTROLS
Do not use the washing mechanisms when the washer fluid reservoir is empty Do not use washing mechanisms when the washer fluid reservoir is empty, otherwise you will damage the washer pump.◀
Washer fluid All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐ General information voir. Antifreeze for washer fluid The recommended minimum filling quantity is Antifreeze is flammable and can cause in‐ 0.2 US gal/1 liter. juries if used improperly. Fill with a mixture of window washing concen‐ Therefore, keep it away from sources of igni‐ trate and water; if needed, add antifreeze ac‐ tion. cording to the manufacturer instructions. Only keep it in the closed original container and Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain inaccessible to children. the correct mixing ratio. Follow the notes and instructions on the con‐ Do not fill in undiluted window washing con‐ tainer. centrate and do not fill in pure water; this could United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is damage the washer system. regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual Do not mix window washing concentrate from states; do not exceed the allowable washer different manufacturers; this could cause the fluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow the washer nozzles to clog. usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐ tainer. Use BMW's Windshield Washer Concen‐ trate or the equivalent.◀ Manual transmission Washer fluid reservoir Adding washer fluid Only add washer fluid when the engine is cool, and then close the cover completely to avoid contact between the washer fluid and hot engine parts. Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀ Pay attention to the shift plane When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push the gearshift lever to the right; otherwise inad‐ vertent shifting into the 3rd or 4th gear could lead to engine damage.◀
63 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 64
CONTROLS Driving
Reverse gear Changing selector lever positions Select only when the vehicle is stationary. When ▷ With the ignition switched on or the engine the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a slight running, the selector lever can be moved resistance needs to be overcome. out of position P. ▷ When the vehicle is stationary, step on the brake before shifting out of P or N; other‐ Steptronic transmission wise, the selector lever is locked: shiftlock. In addition to the fully automatic mode, gears Press on the brake pedal until you can also be shifted manually using Steptronic, start driving refer to page 65. To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a driving position, maintain pres‐ Parking the vehicle sure on the brake pedal until you are ready Secure the vehicle to start.◀ Before leaving the vehicle with the en‐ gine running, move the selector lever to posi‐ tion P and set the handbrake; otherwise, the vehicle will begin moving.◀
Disengaging the remote control To remove the remote control from the ignition lock, first move the selector lever to position P and switch off the engine: interlock. Remove the remote control from the ignition lock, refer A lock prevents accidental shifting into selector to page 57. lever positions R and P. To override the lock, press the button on the Selector lever positions front of the selector lever, see arrow. P R N D M/S + – P Park Displays in the tachometer Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The front wheels are blocked.
R is Reverse Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
N is Neutral For example, engage this position in a car wash. The vehicle can roll.
The selector lever position is displayed and the D Drive engaged gear, such as M4, is displayed in manual mode. Position for normal vehicle operation. All for‐ ward gears are selected automatically.
64 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 65
Driving CONTROLS
Under normal operating conditions, fuel con‐ The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropri‐ sumption is lowest when you are driving in po‐ ate engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not sition D. shift down if the engine speed is too high. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the instru‐ Kickdown ment panel, followed by the current gear. Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance. Press on the accelerator beyond Shifting gears using the shift paddles the resistance point at the full throttle position. on the steering wheel The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow Sport program and manual mode M/S you to shift gears quickly while keeping both hands on the steering wheel. Activating the Sport program ▷ When the shift paddles on the steering wheel are used to shift gears while in auto‐ matic mode, the transmission switches to manual mode. ▷ If the shift paddles are not used to acceler‐ ate or shift gears for a certain amount of time, the transmission switches back to au‐ tomatic mode. If the selector lever is in the M/S gear plane, manual mode remains active. Move the selector lever from position D toward the left into the M/S shifting slot.
The Sport program is activated and DS is dis‐ played. This position is recommended for a per‐ formance-oriented driving style. To deactivate the Sport program or manual mode M/S, move the selector lever to the right into position D.
Activating the M/S manual mode ▷ Pull one of the two shift paddles: Move the selector lever from position D toward The transmission shifts up. the left into the M/S shifting slot. ▷ Press one of the two shift paddles: Push the selector lever forward or backward. The transmission shifts down. Manual mode becomes active and the gear is The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropri‐ changed. ate engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not The tachometer displays the engaged gear, shift down if the engine speed is too high. The e. g. M1. selected gear is briefly displayed in the instru‐ ▷ To shift up: press the selector lever back‐ ment panel, followed by the current gear. ward. ▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ ward.
65 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 66
CONTROLS Driving
Manually unlocking the selector lever lock If the selector lever is locked in position P al‐ though the ignition is switched on, the brake is depressed, and the button on the selector lever is pressed, the selector lever lock can be over‐ ridden: 1. Switch off the ignition. 2. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever. 3. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever until the sleeve is inside out. Pull off the plug-in cable connector if nec‐ essary.
4. Insert the pulling hook 1 into the loop on the passenger side. The pulling hook is found in the vehicle document portfolio or in the pouch of the wheel change set, refer to page 242. 5. Pull the loop upward. 6. Move the selector lever into the desired po‐ sition, pressing the button on the front of the selector lever. Set the parking brake Manually unlock the selector lever lock for towing only. Before manually unlocking the selector lever lock, pull the parking brake firmly; otherwise, the vehicle may roll away and cause personal injury or property damage.◀
66 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 67
Displays CONTROLS
Displays
Vehicle equipment Trip odometer This chapter describes all series equipment as Displaying the trip odometer well as country-specific and special equipment Press button 3 briefly. offered for this model series. Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in Resetting the trip odometer your vehicle, for instance due to the selected 1. Press button 3 briefly. special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ The trip odometer is displayed. tems. 2. Press button 3 again. When using the features and systems described The trip odometer is reset. here, adhere to local regulations. Time Set the time, refer to page 71. Odometer, external tem‐ perature display, clock External temperature, external temperature warning At a glance If the display drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃, a signal sounds and a warning light lights up. There is the increased danger of ice. Ice on roads Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃, there can be a risk of ice on roads. Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shady roads, for example, to avoid the increased dan‐ ger of an accident.◀ 1 Current speed 2 Odometer, trip odometer, external temper‐ Units of measure ature, time To set the respective units of measure, miles or 3 Resetting the trip odometer km for the odometer and ℃ or ℉ for the exter‐ nal temperature, refer to page 71. Press the button on the turn indicator lever to open information in display area 2. The following information is displayed consecu‐ tively: ▷ Trip odometer ▷ Time ▷ External temperature
67 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 68
CONTROLS Displays
Tachometer Range After the reserve range is reached: ▷ The remaining LEDs change from orange to red, arrow. ▷ A message is briefly displayed on the Con‐ trol Display. ▷ The remaining range is shown on the tach‐ ometer. ▷ When a dynamic driving style is used, such as when corners are taken rapidly, engine It is imperative that you avoid engine speeds in functions are not ensured. the red warning field. In this range, the fuel The message appears continuously below a supply is interrupted to protect the engine. range of approx. 30 miles/50 km. Refuel promptly At the latest, refuel at a range below Coolant temperature 30 miles/50 km; otherwise, the engine function A warning lamp will come on if the coolant, and is not ensured and damage may occur.◀ therefore the engine, becomes too hot. In addi‐ tion, a message will appear on the Control Dis‐ play. Computer Check the coolant level, refer to page 232. Opening information in the tachometer Fuel gauge
Press the button on the turn indicator lever.
The arrow next to the fuel pump symbol on the Overview of the information fuel gauge indicates the side of the vehicle with The following information is displayed consecu‐ the fuel filler flap. tively by repeatedly pressing the button on the The vehicle inclination may cause the display to turn indicator lever: vary. ▷ Range. Notes on refueling, refer to page 212. ▷ Average fuel consumption. Filling capacities, refer to page 261. ▷ Current fuel consumption. ▷ Average speed.
68 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 69
Displays CONTROLS
To set the corresponding units of measure, re‐ 2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer" fer to page 71.
Information in detail
Range Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel. It is calculated based on your driving style over the last 18 miles/30 km. Displays on the "Onboard info": Average fuel consumption This is calculated for the period during which the engine is running. With the trip computer, refer to page 69, the average consumption can be displayed for an additional distance. To reset the average consumption: press the button on the turn indicator lever for ap‐ prox. 2 seconds. ▷ Range. Current fuel consumption ▷ Distance to destination. Displays the current fuel consumption. You can ▷ Estimated time of arrival if a destination check whether you are currently driving in an was entered in the navigation system. efficient and environmentally-friendly manner. Displays on the "Trip computer": Average speed Periods in which the vehicle was parked and the engine was switched off manually are not included in the average speed calculations. With the trip computer, refer to page 69, the average speed can be displayed for an addi‐ tional distance. To reset the average speed: press the button on the turn indicator lever for approx. 2 sec‐ onds. ▷ Departure time. ▷ Trip duration. Displays on the Control Display ▷ Trip distance. Display the computer or trip computer on the Both displays show: Control Display. ▷ Average fuel consumption. 1. "Vehicle Info" ▷ Average speed.
69 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 70
CONTROLS Displays
Resetting the fuel consumption and Symbol Function speed Set the rain sensor, refer to Resetting the values for average speed and page 61. average fuel consumption: 1. Select the respective menu item and press the MINI joystick. 2. Press the MINI joystick again to confirm Open Check-Control, refer to your selection. page 74.
Resetting the trip computer Resetting all values: Exit the menu. 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Trip computer" 3. "Reset"
Settings and information Exiting displays
Operating concept Some settings and information can only be cre‐ ated or opened while the ignition is switched on, the vehicle is standing, and the doors are closed.
1. Press the button on the turn indicator lever repeatedly until "HOME" is displayed. 2. Hold the button down. The current speed is displayed again. Displays are also exited if no entries are made within approx. 8 seconds. 1 Button for: ▷ Selecting the display. ▷ Setting values. ▷ Confirming the selected display or set values. ▷ Calling up computer information 68.
70 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 71
Displays CONTROLS
Next setting or information Clock
Setting the time 1. "Settings"
1. Within a setting or information display, press the button on the turn indicator lever repeatedly until "NEXT" is displayed. 2. Hold the button down. 2. "Time/Date" Direct change to the next setting or piece of in‐ formation.
Units of measure The units of measure, such as for fuel consump‐ tion, route/distance, and temperature, can be changed. The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use. 3. "Time:" 1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units"
4. Turn the MINI joystick to set the hours and press the MINI joystick. 3. Select the desired menu item. 5. Turn the MINI joystick to set the minutes 4. Select the desired unit. and press the MINI joystick. The time is stored.
Setting the time format 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date"
71 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 72
CONTROLS Displays
3. "Format:" 3. "Format:" 4. Select the desired format. 4. Select the desired format. The time format is stored. The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.
Setting the time zone 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Time zone:" 4. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired time The settings are stored for the remote control zone is displayed and press the MINI joy‐ currently in use. stick. The time zone is stored. Settings on the Control Display Date Language Setting the date 1. "Settings" Setting the language 2. "Time/Date" 1. "Settings" 3. "Date:" 2. "Language/Units" 4. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired day 3. "Language:" is displayed and press the MINI joystick. 5. Make the necessary settings for the month and year. The date is stored.
Setting the date format 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date"
4. Select the desired language. The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use.
Setting the voice dialog Voice dialog for the voice activation system, re‐ fer to page 25.
72 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 73
Displays CONTROLS
Brightness The current service requirements can be read The brightness is automatically adapted to the out from the remote control by the service spe‐ ambient lighting conditions. However, the basic cialist. setting can be changed when the low beams are switched on. Detailed information on service requirements 1. "Settings" More information on the scope of service re‐ 2. "Control display" quired can be displayed on the Control Display. 3. "Brightness" 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status"
4. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired set‐ ting is selected. 3. "Service required" 5. Press the MINI joystick. Required maintenance procedures and legally The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ mandated inspections are displayed. rently in use. Additional information can be displayed on Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐ each entry: ness control may not be clearly visible. Select the entry and press the MINI joystick. To exit from the menu: Service requirements Move the MINI joystick to the left.
Symbols
Symbols Description No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or a le‐ gally mandated inspection is approaching. The remaining driving distance and the date of the next scheduled service are displayed briefly The service deadline has al‐ immediately after you start the engine or ready passed. switch on the ignition.
73 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 74
CONTROLS Displays
Entering appointment dates Check Control Enter the dates for the required inspections. Make sure the date on the Control Display is set The concept correctly. The Check Control monitors vehicle functions and alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys‐ 1. "Vehicle Info" tems being monitored. 2. "Vehicle status" A Check Control message consists of indicator 3. "Service required" and warning lamps in the instrument cluster and, in some circumstances, an acoustic signal and text messages at the top of the Control Dis‐ play.
Indicator/warning lamps
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in a variety of combinations and colors in display area 1 or 2.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the 5. Open the menu for entering the deadline. engine is started or the ignition is switched on. 6. "Date:" 7. Create the settings. 8. Press the MINI joystick to apply the setting. The year is highlighted. 9. Turn the MINI joystick to create the setting. 10. Press the MINI joystick to apply the setting. The date entry is stored. To exit from the menu: Move the MINI joystick to the left. The symbol indicates that Check Control messages have been stored. The Check Control messages can be displayed later.
74 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 75
Displays CONTROLS
Text messages Other Check Control messages are hidden au‐ Text messages at the upper edge of the Control tomatically after approx. 20 seconds. However, Display in combination with a symbol in the in‐ they are stored and can be displayed again strument cluster explain a Check Control mes‐ later. sage and the meaning of the indicator and They are marked with the symbol warning lamps. shown here.
Supplementary text messages Viewing stored Check Control messages Additional information, such as on the cause of a fault or the required action, can be called up The stored Check Control messages can only be via Check Control. displayed while the driver's door is closed. 1. Press the button on the turn indicator lever repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding light comes on. 2. Press and hold the button until the display Hiding Check Control messages changes. 3. Press the button repeatedly until the corre‐ sponding symbol and "CHECK INFO" ap‐ pear on the display.
Press the button on the turn indicator lever.
Some Check Control messages are displayed continuously and are not cleared until the mal‐ 4. Press and hold the button. function is eliminated. If several malfunctions occur at once, the messages are displayed con‐ If there is no Check Control message, this is secutively. indicated by "CHECK OK". If a Check Control message has been They are marked with the symbol stored, the corresponding message is dis‐ shown here. played.
75 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 76
CONTROLS Displays
The text message is also displayed on the Control Display. 5. Press the button to check for other mes‐ sages.
Displaying on the Control Display 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Check Control"
4. Select the text message.
76 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 77
Lamps CONTROLS
Lamps
Vehicle equipment matically switched off when the light switch is in position 0, 2, or 3. This chapter describes all series equipment as Switch on the parking lights if necessary, switch well as country-specific and special equipment position 1. offered for this model series. Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in Parking lights your vehicle, for instance due to the selected Switch position 1: the vehicle lights light up on special equipment or the country version. This all sides. also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. Do not use the parking lights for extended peri‐ ods; otherwise, the battery may become dis‐ When using the features and systems described charged and it would then be impossible to here, adhere to local regulations. start the engine. When parking, it is preferable to switch on the At a glance one-sided roadside parking lights, refer to page 78.
Low beams Switch position 2: the low beams are lit when the ignition is switched on.
Automatic headlight control Switch position 3: the low beams are switched on and off automatically depending on the am‐ bient light, e.g., in tunnels, in twilight, or if 0 Lamps off / daytime running lights there is precipitation. Adaptive Light Control is 1 Parking lights and daytime running lights active. 2 Low-beam headlights and welcome lights A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can 3 Automatic headlight control, Adaptive Light cause the lights to be switched on. Control, daytime running lights, and wel‐ The low beams remain switched on independ‐ come lights ent of the ambient lighting conditions when you switch on the front fog lights. Personal responsibility Parking lights/low The automatic headlamp control cannot beams, headlight con‐ serve as a substitute for your personal judg‐ ment in determining when the lamps should be trol switched on in response to ambient lighting conditions. General information When the driver's door is opened with the igni‐ tion switched off, the exterior lighting is auto‐
77 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 78
CONTROLS Lamps
For example, the sensors are unable to detect Daytime running lights fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you The daytime running lights light up in switch should always switch on the lamps manually position 0, 1, or 3 when the ignition is switched under these conditions.◀ on. The exterior lighting goes out automatically af‐ The exterior lighting goes out automatically af‐ ter the vehicle is switched off. ter the vehicle is switched off. In switch position 1, the parking lights light up High-beams/roadside parking lights after the ignition is switched off.
Activating/deactivating In some countries, driving with daytime run‐ ning lights is mandatory; for this reason, day‐ time running lights cannot be deactivated in these cases. 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 1 Turn signal/roadside parking light 3. "Daytime running lamps" 2 Switching on the high-beams 3 Switching off the high-beams/headlight flasher
To assist in parking, the vehicle can be illumi‐ nated on one side; note the country-specific regulations. The roadside parking lights drain the battery. Therefore, do not leave them on for unduly long periods of time; otherwise, the battery The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ might not have enough power to start the en‐ rently in use. gine. Welcome lights Switching on the roadside parking light If the light switch stays in switch position 2 or 3 To switch on the roadside parking light on the after the vehicle is switched off, the parking left or right, press the turn indicator lever up or lights and the interior lights light up for a cer‐ down after switching off the vehicle, arrow 1. tain period when the vehicle is unlocked.
Switching off the roadside parking light Headlight courtesy delay feature Press the lever up or down to the resistance The low beams stay lit for a short while after point. the ignition is switched off, if the lights are switched off and the headlight flasher is switched on.
78 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 79
Lamps CONTROLS
Setting the duration has failed. Have the system checked as soon as 1. "Settings" possible. 2. "Lighting" 3. "Pathway light.: s" Fog lights
At a glance
4. Set the duration. The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. To switch on the front fog lights: press the switch. Adaptive Light Control To switch off, press the respective switch up‐ ward or downward again. The concept Fog lights Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlight control system that enables dynamic illumina‐ The parking lights or low beams must be tion of the road surface. switched on. The green indicator lamp lights up when the front fog lights are switched on. Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐ rameters, the light from the headlight follows Depending on the vehicle equipment, the front the course of the road. fog lights are switched off when the headlight flasher or the high-beams are activated. Activating If the automatic headlight control is activated, With the ignition switch on, turn the light switch refer to page 77, the low beams are switched to position 3, refer to page 77. on automatically when the front fog lights are switched on. To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐ tive Light Control does not swivel to the driver's side when the vehicle is at a standstill. Instrument lighting When driving in reverse, Adaptive Light Control is not active. The parking lights or low beams must be switched on to adjust the brightness. The Malfunction brightness is increased to a certain limit and is then reduced again. The warning light lights up. A message appears on the Control Display. Adap‐ tive Light Control is malfunctioning or
79 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 80
CONTROLS Lamps
▷ Press the button briefly: the brightness Switching the reading lights on/off changes in stages. Front: press the switch. ▷ Press and hold the button: the brightness Rear: press the button. changes continuously.
Ambient lighting The color and brightness of the ambient light‐ Interior lights ing can be changed. The interior lights, the footwell lights and the cargo area light are controlled automatically. To avoid draining the battery, all lights inside the vehicle are switched off some time after the ignition is switched off.
Switching interior lights on/off manually
Press the switch forward: the color changes in steps. Press the switch back: the brightness changes in steps.
Intermediate settings and intermediate colors are possible. For continuously changing colors of the ambi‐ To switch the interior lights on/off: press the ent lighting, press the switch forward for more switch. than 10 seconds. For Canadian vehicles: If the interior lights are to remain switched off, Continuously changing colors of the ambient press the switch for approx. 3 seconds. lighting is not available. Reading lights Reading lights are located in the front next to the interior light and in the rear.
80 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 81
Safety CONTROLS
Safety
Vehicle equipment When using the features and systems described here, adhere to local regulations. This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series. Therefore, it also Airbags describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected The graphic shows the MINI Paceman as an ex‐ special equipment or the country version. This ample. also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems.
1 Front airbags 3 Side airbag 2 Knee airbag 4 Head airbags
Front airbags Head airbags Front airbags help protect the driver and front In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports passenger by responding to frontal impacts in the head. which safety belts alone cannot provide ade‐ quate restraint. Knee airbag The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal Side airbags impact. In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the side of the body in the chest and lap area.
81 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 82
CONTROLS Safety
Protective action ▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐ Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ nents or the wiring in the airbag system. tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end This also applies to steering wheel covers, collisions. the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars and the sides of the headliner.◀ Information on how to ensure the opti‐ Even when all instructions are followed closely, mal protective effect of the airbags injury from contact with the airbags cannot be ▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags. ruled out in certain situations. ▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the The ignition and inflation noise may lead to steering wheel rim, holding your hands at short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐ the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to ing impairment in sensitive individuals. keep the danger of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible if the airbag is trig‐ In the case of a malfunction, deactivation gered. and after triggering of the airbags ▷ There should be no people, animals, or ob‐ Do not touch the individual components imme‐ jects between an airbag and a person. diately after the system has been triggered; otherwise, there is the danger of burns. ▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area. Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐ mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by ▷ Keep the dashboard and window on the your service center or a workshop that has the front passenger side clear, i.e., do not cover necessary authorization for handling explo‐ with adhesive labels or coverings, and do sives. not attach holders or cables such as for navigation instruments and mobile phones. Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐ tem could lead to failure in an emergency or ▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting undesired triggering of the airbag, either of correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs which could result in injury.◀ in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries can occur if the front airbag is triggered. Warning notices and information about the air‐ ▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or bags can also be found on the sun visors. other objects on the front passenger seat that are not approved specifically for seats Automatic deactivation of the front with integrated side airbags. passenger airbags ▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as The system determines whether the front pas‐ jackets, over the backrests. senger seat is occupied by measuring the elec‐ trical resistance of the human body. ▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag and do not rest The front, side, and knee airbags on the front against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries passenger side are activated or deactivated ac‐ can occur if the airbags are triggered. cordingly by the system. ▷ Do not remove the airbag restraint system. The indicator lamp above the interior rearview mirror, refer to page 83, shows the current ▷ Do not remove the steering wheel. status of the front passenger airbags, deacti‐ ▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐ vated or activated. bag cover panels, cover them or modify them in any way.
82 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 83
Safety CONTROLS
Leave feet in the footwell Indicator light for the front passenger Make sure that the front passenger keeps airbags his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, the front passenger airbags may not function prop‐ erly.◀
Child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat Before transporting a child on the front passen‐ ger seat, read the safety and operating instruc‐ tions under Transporting children safely, refer to page 52.◀ The indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐ bags indicates the operating state of the front Malfunction of the automatic passenger airbags. deactivation system The light indicates whether the airbags are acti‐ When transporting older children and adults, vated or deactivated. the front passenger airbags may be deactivated in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indi‐ ▷ The indicator lamp lights up cator lamp for the front passenger airbags when a child who is properly lights up. seated in a child restraint fix‐ In this case, change the sitting position so that ing system intended for that the front passenger airbags are activated and purpose is detected on the the indicator lamp goes out. seat or the seat is empty. The airbags on the front passen‐ If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have ger side are not activated. the person sit in the rear. ▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when, To make sure that occupation of the seat cush‐ for example, a correctly seated person of ion can be detected correctly: sufficient size is detected on the seat. The ▷ Do not attach seat covers, seat cushion airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐ padding, ball mats, or other items to the tivated. front passenger seat unless they are specifi‐ Most child seats are detected by the system. cally recommended by the manufacturer of Especially the child seats required by NHTSA at your MINI. the time that the vehicle was manufactured. ▷ Do not place electronic devices on the pas‐ After installing a child seat, make sure that the senger seat if a child restraint fixing system indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags is mounted on the seat. lights up. This indicates that the child seat has ▷ Do not place objects under the seat that been detected and the front passenger airbags could press against the seat from below. are not activated.
83 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 84
CONTROLS Safety
Operational readiness of airbag system Functional requirements The system must have been initialized when the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐ wise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not en‐ sured. Initialize the system after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.
System limits In the radio ready state and beyond, re‐ Sudden tire damage fer to page 57, the warning light lights Sudden serious tire damage caused by up briefly to indicate that the entire air‐ external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐ bag system and the belt tensioners are opera‐ vance.◀ tional. A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires cannot be detected. Therefore, check the tire Airbag system malfunction inflation pressure regularly. ▷ Warning light does not light up in the radio The system could be delayed or malfunction in ready state. the following situations: ▷ Warning light remains permanently on. ▷ When the system has not been initialized. Have the airbag system checked without ▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road delay if there is a malfunction surface. In the event of a malfunction in the airbag sys‐ ▷ Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels, tem, have it checked without delay; otherwise, high lateral acceleration. there is the risk that the system will not func‐ ▷ When driving with snow chains. tion as intended even if a sufficiently severe ac‐ cident occurs.◀ Status display The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., FTM Flat Tire Monitor whether or not the FTM is active.
The concept 1. "Vehicle Info" The system does not measure the actual infla‐ 2. "Vehicle status" tion pressure in the tires. The system detects a pressure loss in a tire by comparing the rotational speeds of the individ‐ ual wheels while moving. In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corre‐ sponding wheel change. This is detected and reported as a flat tire.
84 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 85
Safety CONTROLS
3. "Flat Tire Monitor" Indication of a flat tire The warning lights come on in yellow and red. A message appears on the Control Display. In addition, a signal sounds. There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure.
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ The status is displayed. vers. 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with Initialization regular tires or run-flat tires. The initialization process adopts the set infla‐ Run-flat tires, refer to page 224, are la‐ tion tire pressures as reference values for the beled with a circular symbol containing the detection of a flat tire. Initialization is started by letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall. confirming the inflation pressures. Do not continue driving without run-flat Do not initialize the system when driving with tires snow chains. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not 1. "Vehicle Info" equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving may result in serious accidents.◀ 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Reset" When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐ bility Control is switched on if necessary.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires 1. Identify the damaged tire. Do this by checking the inflation pressure in all four tires. The tire pressure gauge of the Mobility Sys‐ 4. Start the engine, but do not start driving. tem, refer to page 225, can be used for this purpose. 5. Start the initialization with "Reset". If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is 6. Drive away. correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have The initialization is completed while driving, been initialized. In this case, initialize the which can be interrupted at any time. The initi‐ system. alization automatically continues when driving If an identification is not possible, please resumes. contact the service center. 2. Rectify the flat tire using the Mobility Sys‐ tem, refer to page 225.
85 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 86
CONTROLS Safety
Run-flat tires A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a You can continue driving with a damaged tire change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐ at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance and altered self-steering prop‐ Continued driving with a flat tire erties.◀ If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: Final tire failure 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ Vibrations or loud noises while driving vers. can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do 3. At the next opportunity, check the inflation not continue driving, and contact your service pressure in all four tires. center.◀ If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system. Tire Pressure Monitor Possible driving distance with complete loss of TPM tire inflation pressure: The concept The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on the cargo load The system monitors the tire pressure in the and the driving style and conditions. four mounted tires. The system notifies you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or For a vehicle containing an average load, the more tires. Sensors in the tire valves measure possible driving distance is ap‐ the tire pressure. prox. 50 miles/80 km. When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire, Notes its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐ duced lane stability during braking, a longer Tire damage caused by external influen‐ braking distance, and altered self-steering ces properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐ Sudden tire damage caused by external influ‐ ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐ ences cannot be indicated in advance.◀ ing over obstacles, e. g., curbs, potholes, etc. To operate the system, also note the additional Because the possible driving distance depends information and instructions contained under on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the Tire inflation pressure, refer to page 216. actual distance may be smaller or greater de‐ pending on the driving speed, road conditions, Functional requirements external temperature, cargo load, etc. The system must have been reset while the in‐ Continued driving with a flat tire flation pressure was correct; otherwise, it may Drive moderately and do not exceed a not reliably signal a loss in pressure. speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Perform a system reset after adjusting the tire inflation pressure to a new value and after changing a tire or wheel Always use wheels with TPM electronics to en‐ sure that the system will operate properly.
86 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 87
Safety CONTROLS
Status display Performing a reset The current status of the Tire Pressure Monitor Perform a system reset after adjusting the tire TPM can be displayed on the Control Display, inflation pressure to a new value and after e.g., whether or not the TPM is active. changing a tire or wheel. 1. "Vehicle Info" 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM" 3. "Reset"
The status is displayed. 4. Start the engine - do not drive away. 5. Start the initialization with "Reset". Status display 6. Drive away. The tire and system status is indicated on the The wheels are shown in gray and the status is Control Display by the color of the tires and a displayed. text. After a short trip at over 20 mph/30 km/h, the All wheels are green set tire inflation pressures are adopted as tar‐ get values. The reset is completed automati‐ The system is active and issues warnings based cally as you drive. on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset. After a successful reset, the wheels appear in green on the Control Display and "Status: TPM One wheel is yellow active" is displayed. A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in The trip can be interrupted at any time. When the indicated tire. driving resumes, the reset is continued auto‐ matically. All wheels are yellow Low tire pressure message A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in several tires. The warning lights come on in yellow and red. A Check Control message is Wheels, gray displayed. A message is displayed on The system cannot detect a flat tire. the onboard monitor. In addition, a sig‐ nal sounds. Reasons for this may be: ▷ The system is being reset. ▷ There is a flat tire or substantial loss of infla‐ ▷ Malfunction. tion pressure on the indicated wheel.
87 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 88
CONTROLS Safety
▷ The system was not reset after a wheel Run-flat tires change and thus issues warnings based on You can continue driving with a damaged tire the inflation pressures initialized last. at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Do not continue driving without run-flat Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ tires vers. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving regular tires or run-flat tires. may result in serious accidents.◀ Run-flat tires, refer to page 224, are la‐ beled on the tire sidewall with a circular Continued driving with a flat tire symbol containing the letters RSC. If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: Do not continue driving without run-flat tires 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ vers. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. may result in serious accidents.◀ 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity. When a low inflation pressure is indicated, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on if nec‐ If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is essary. correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset. Reset the system. Actions in the event of a flat tire Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure: Normal tires The possible driving distance after a loss of tire 1. Identify the damaged tire. inflation pressure depends on the cargo load Do this by checking the air pressure in all and the driving style and conditions. four tires. The tire pressure gauge of the For a vehicle containing an average load, the Mobility System, refer to page 225, can be possible driving distance is ap‐ used for this purpose. prox. 50 miles/80 km. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire, correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐ have been reset. Reset the system. duced lane stability during braking, a longer If an identification is not possible, please braking distance, and altered self-steering contact the service center. properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐ ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐ 2. Rectify the flat tire using the Mobility Sys‐ ing over obstacles, e. g., curbs, potholes, etc. tem, refer to page 225. Because the possible driving distance depends Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility Sys‐ on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the tem, may damage the TPM wheel electron‐ actual distance may be smaller or greater de‐ ics. In this case, have the electronics pending on the driving speed, road conditions, checked at the next opportunity and have external temperature, cargo load, etc. them replaced if necessary.
88 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 89
Safety CONTROLS
Continued driving with a flat tire the tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure de‐ Drive moderately and do not exceed a creases when the tire temperature drops. In speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. case of severe temperature drops, this behavior may lead to a warning on account of the de‐ A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a fined warning limits. change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐ duced lane stability during braking, a longer Malfunction braking distance and altered self-steering prop‐ erties.◀ The yellow warning light flashes yellow and then lights up continuously. Final tire failure A Check Control message is displayed. Vibrations or loud noises while driving An additional message is displayed on can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce the onboard monitor. speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do A flat tire or tire inflation pressure loss cannot not continue driving, and contact your service be detected. center.◀ Display in the following situations: ▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is Message indicating that the inflation mounted, e.g., a compact wheel: pressure needs to be checked Have the system checked by the service The yellow warning light lights up. center if necessary. A Check Control message is displayed. ▷ Malfunction: An additional message is displayed on Have the system checked by the service the onboard monitor. center. ▷ The system has detected that a wheel was ▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. changed but a reset was not performed. Reset the system again. ▷ The tire was not inflated according to speci‐ The yellow warning light flashes and fications. then lights up continuously. ▷ The tire pressure has dropped since the last A Check Control message is displayed. confirmation. An additional message is displayed on In this case: the onboard monitor. ▷ Check the tire inflation pressure and correct it if necessary. A flat tire or tire inflation pressure loss cannot be detected. ▷ After changing a wheel, reset the system. Display in the following situation: System limits ▷ Disturbance by other systems or devices The system will not function properly if a reset with the same radio frequency: was not performed, e.g., it may identify a tire as After leaving the area of the disturbance, flat although the tire is filled to the correct infla‐ the system automatically becomes active tion pressure. again. The tire pressure depends on the temperature of the tire. An increase in the tire temperature, e.g., while driving or due to sunlight, increases
89 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 90
CONTROLS Safety
Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction Each tire, including the spare (if provided) telltale after replacing one or more tires or should be checked monthly when cold and in‐ wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re‐ flated to the inflation pressure recommended placement or alternate tires and wheels allow by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle the TPMS to continue to function properly. placard or tire inflation pressure label (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation Speed limit pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.). The concept As an added safety feature, your vehicle has Enter a speed for which a Check Control mes‐ been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sage will be displayed when the speed is system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐ reached. This enables you to receive warnings if sure telltale when one or more of your tires is you exceed a speed limit in an urban area, for significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when example. the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you You are only warned of reaching this speed a should stop and check your tires as soon as second time if your vehicle speed falls below it possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐ again by at least 3 mph/5 km/h. sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to Displaying, setting or changing the tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐ limit ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the 1. "Settings" vehicle's handling and stopping ability. 2. "Speed" Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's 3. "Warning at:" responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi‐ 4. Turn the MINI joystick to accept the setting. mately one minute and then remain continu‐ ously illuminated. This sequence will continue 5. Press the MINI joystick to apply the setting. upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as The limit is stored. the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be Applying your current speed as the limit able to detect or signal low tire pressure as in‐ 1. "Settings" tended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a va‐ 2. "Speed" riety of reasons, including the installation of re‐ placement or alternate tires or wheels on the
90 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 91
Safety CONTROLS
3. "Select current speed"
4. Press the MINI joystick. The system adopts your current speed as the limit.
Activating/deactivating the limit 1. "Settings" 2. "Speed" 3. "Warning"
4. Press the MINI joystick.
91 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 92
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle equipment possible. This system utilizes all of the benefits provided by ABS. This chapter describes all series equipment as Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal well as country-specific and special equipment for the duration of full braking. offered for this model series. Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This Dynamic Stability Con‐ also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ trol DSC tems. When using the features and systems described The concept here, adhere to local regulations. DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels when driving away and accelerating. DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐ Antilock Brake System tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Subject ABS to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine speed ABS prevents locking of the wheels during and by applying brakes to the individual braking. wheels. Steerability is maintained even during full brak‐ DSC is operational every time you start the en‐ ing. This increases active driving safety. gine. ABS is operational every time you start the en‐ Adjust your driving style to the situation gine. An appropriate driving style is always the responsibility of the driver. Electronic brake-force distribution EBV The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even The system controls the brake pressure in the with DSC. rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior. Do not reduce the additional safety margin CBC Cornering Brake Control with a risky driving style, as otherwise there is a risk of an accident.◀ When braking in curves or during a lane change, driving stability and steering response are improved further.
Brake assistant When the brakes are applied rapidly, this sys‐ tem automatically produces the maximum braking force boost. In this way, the system helps keep the braking distance as short as
92 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 93
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
Deactivating DSC
DSC and DTC deactivated. Press the switch until the DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up in the speedometer and DSC OFF appears in the tachometer. DSC is deactivated. Dynamic Traction Con‐ Intervening measures to stabilize the vehicle and give it forward momentum are no longer trol DTC executed. The concept When driving with snow chains or to rock the The DTC system is a version of the DSC in which vehicle free of snow, it may be useful to deacti‐ forward momentum is optimized. vate DSC temporarily. The system ensures maximum forward mo‐ To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again mentum on special road conditions, e.g., unp‐ as soon as possible. lowed snowy roads, but driving stability is lim‐ ited. Activating DSC It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri‐ Press the switch again; the DSC indicator lamps ate caution. in the display elements go out. You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances: Indicator/warning lights ▷ When driving in sand, on snowy inclines, in The indicator lamp in the tachometer slush, or on unplowed, snow-covered road flashes: DSC is controlling the drive surfaces forces and brake forces. ▷ When rocking a vehicle free or starting off The indicator lamp lights up: DSC and DTC has in deep snow, sand, or on loose ground failed. ▷ When driving with snow chains. The indicator lamp in the speedometer lights up and DSC OFF appears in the tachometer.
93 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 94
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
Activating DTC
DTC is activated. Press the switch; the DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up in the speedometer and TRACTION appears in the tachometer. Dynamic Stability Hill drive-off assistant Control DSC is deactivated, Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated. This system supports driving away on gradients. The parking brake is not required.
Deactivating DTC 1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake. Press the switch again; the DSC OFF indicator lamp in the speedometer and TRACTION in the 2. Release the foot brake and drive away tachometer go out. without delay. In the interest of better forward momentum, Driving off without delay brake intervention is performed in the manner After releasing the foot brake, start driv‐ of a differential lock when the drive wheels spin ing without delay, since the drive-off assistant unevenly even when DSC/DTC is deactivated. will not hold the vehicle in place for more than approx. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin Indicator/warning lamps rolling back.◀ The indicator lamp in the tachometer flashes: DTC is controlling the drive forces and brake forces. ALL4 all-wheel system The indicator lamp lights up: DSC and DTC has failed. ALL4 is the all-wheel system of your MINI. The combined effects of ALL4 and DSC further opti‐ The indicator lamp in the speedometer mize the traction and dynamic driving charac‐ lights up and TRACTION appears in the teristics. The ALL4 all-wheel system variably tachometer. distributes the drive forces to the front and rear axles depending on the driving situation and prevailing road conditions.
Sport button When this button is pressed, the vehicle re‐ sponds in an even sportier manner.
94 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 95
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
▷ The engine responds more spontaneously to accelerator movements. ▷ The steering responds more directly. ▷ Cooper S, John Cooper Works: the engine sounds sportier when coasting. ▷ For Steptronic transmissions: more rapid gear changes in the Sport program.
Activating the system
Press the switch; the LED in the button lights up and SPORT is displayed briefly in the tachome‐ ter.
Deactivating the system ▷ Press the switch again. ▷ Switch the engine off.
95 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 96
CONTROLS Driving comfort
Driving comfort
Vehicle equipment Controls This chapter describes all series equipment as At a glance well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series. Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using the features and systems described here, adhere to local regulations.
1 Maintaining, storing, and increasing the Cruise control speed 2 Activating/deactivating cruise control The concept 3 Maintaining, storing, and reducing the speed The system is functional at speeds beginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. 4 Resuming cruise control The vehicle stores and maintains the speed specified using the controls on the steering Switching on wheel. Press button 2. Do not use cruise control The indicator lamp lights up in the Do not use the system if unfavorable con‐ speedometer. Cruise control is ready to ditions make it impossible to drive at a constant operate and can be activated. speed, for instance: ▷ On curvy roads. Switching off ▷ In heavy traffic. Press button 2. ▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or ▷ When activated: press twice. on a loose road surface. ▷ When interrupted: press once. Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle The displays go out. The stored target speed is and cause an accident.◀ cleared.
Interrupting Press button 2. The system is interrupted automatically if ▷ The brakes are applied. ▷ The clutch pedal is depressed.
96 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 97
Driving comfort CONTROLS
▷ The transmission position D is disengaged. Display in the tachometer ▷ DSC intervenes.
Maintaining, storing the current speed Press button 1 or button 3. The current speed is maintained and stored. It is displayed briefly in the tachometer. On downhill gradients, it may prove impossible to maintain the set speed if the engine braking power is insufficient. On uphill gradients, it may prove impossible to maintain the set speed if The selected speed is displayed briefly. the engine power output is insufficient. If the display --- mph or --- km/h appears briefly, conditions may not be adequate to op‐ Increasing speed erate the system. ▷ Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired speed is reached. For better control Each time the button is pressed, the speed The indicator lamp lights up in the increases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h. speedometer. Cruise control is ready to ▷ Press and hold button 1 until the desired operate and can be activated. speed is reached. The vehicle accelerates without pressure on Malfunction the accelerator pedal. After the button is released, the achieved speed is maintained The warning lamp in the tachometer and stored. lights up. A message appears on the Control Dis‐ Decreasing speed play. Press button 3 repeatedly or hold it until the The system is malfunctioning or has failed. desired speed is reached. The functions are the same those when the speed is increased, only that the speed is re‐ Park Distance Control duced. PDC Resuming a speed stored beforehand Press button 4. The concept The last stored speed is resumed and main‐ PDC provides support when parking in reverse. tained. Signal tones and a visual display indicate that the vehicle is approaching an object behind it. The stored speed is cleared when the ignition is Measurements are made by four ultrasound switched off. sensors in the bumpers. The range of these sensors is approx. 6 ft/2 m. An acoustic warning is first given:
97 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 98
CONTROLS Driving comfort
▷ By the two corner sensors at ap‐ dent could result from road users or objects prox. 24 in/60 cm. located outside of the PDC detection range. ▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx. Loud noises from outside and inside the vehicle 5 ft/1.50 m. may prevent you from hearing the PDC's signal tone.◀ Avoid driving quickly with PDC PDC is a parking aid that can display ob‐ Malfunction jects when the vehicle approaches them slowly, as is the case during parking maneuvers. Avoid The warning light lights up. A message driving toward an object quickly as the system appears on the Control Display. PDC is may then be too late in issuing a warning for malfunctioning or has failed. Have the technical reasons.◀ system checked.
To ensure full functionality of the sensors, keep Automatic operation the sensors clean and free of ice. When using The system is activated after approx. one sec‐ high-pressure washers, do not spray the sen‐ ond when reverse gear or selector lever posi‐ sors for long periods and maintain a distance of tion R is engaged while the engine is running or at least 12 in/30 cm. the ignition is switched on. Await this short pe‐ riod before setting the vehicle into motion.
Signal tones The closer the vehicle is to the object, the shorter the intervals become. If the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 12 in/30 cm, a continuous tone is sounded. If the distance remains constant, for example when driving parallel to a wall, the signal tone is stopped after approx. 3 seconds.
PDC with visual warning Displaying the approach to an object on the Control Display. The contours of distant objects are displayed on the Control Display before a signal tone is output. The display is shown on the Control Display as soon as reverse gear or selector lever position R is engaged.
System limits Check the traffic situation as well PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa‐ tion. Check the traffic situation around the ve‐ hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐
98 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 99
Climate CONTROLS
Climate
Vehicle equipment special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ This chapter describes all series equipment as tems. well as country-specific and special equipment When using the features and systems described offered for this model series. Therefore, it also here, adhere to local regulations. describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
Air conditioner
1 Air volume 5 Rear window defroster 2 Cooling function 6 Vent settings 3 Recirculated air mode 7 Windshield heating 4 Temperature
Notes lated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in the interior continuously worsens.◀ Sufficient ventilation When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐ tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐ nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recircu‐
99 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 100
CONTROLS Climate
Air volume volume if necessary. Make sure that air can flow onto the windshield. Vary the air volume. The higher the rate, the more effective the Recirculated air mode is automatically deacti‐ heating or cooling will be. vated at low external temperatures. The air flow rate may be reduced Temperature or the blower may be switched off entirely to save on battery power. Turn upward, red, to raise the temperature. Switching the system on/off Turn downward, blue, to lower the temperature. Turn the rotary switch for the air volume to 0. The blower and air conditioner are completely switched off and the air supply is cut off. Rear window defroster Set any air volume to switch on the air condi‐ The rear window defroster tioning. switches off automatically after a certain period of time. Cooling function The rear window defroster The passenger compartment can power may be lowered or even only be cooled with the engine switched off entirely to save on battery power. running.
The cooling function cools and Vent settings dehumidifies the incoming air before reheating it as required, according to Direct the flow of air to the win‐ the temperature setting. dows , to the upper body area , or to the footwell . The cooling function helps to prevent conden‐ Intermediate positions are possi‐ sation on the windows or to remove it quickly. ble. Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started. Windshield heating To cool the air faster and more intensively The windshield heating switches when external temperatures are high, switch off automatically after some on the recirculated air mode. time. Recirculated air mode The windshield heating may be reduced or even switched off en‐ If the air outside the car has an tirely to save on battery power. unpleasant odor or contains pol‐ lutants, shut off the supply to the interior of the car temporarily. Defrosting and defogging windows The system then recirculates the 1. Set the maximum air volume. air currently within the vehicle. 2. Air distribution in position . Should the windows fog up in the recirculated- By switching on the cooling function, the air mode, press the AUTO button or switch off windows are defogged more rapidly. the recirculated-air mode and increase the air 3. Set the highest temperature, red.
100 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 101
Climate CONTROLS
4. Deactivate recirculated air mode. Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter 5. Switch on the windshield heating if neces‐ The microfilter traps dust and pollen. The acti‐ sary. vated-charcoal filter provides additional protec‐ 6. Switch on the rear window defroster if nec‐ tion by filtering gaseous pollutants from the essary. outside air. The service center replaces this combined filter during routine maintenance. Microfilter The microfilter traps dust and pollen. The mi‐ crofilter is changed by the service center during routine maintenance work.
Automatic climate control
1 Air volume, manual 7 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐ 2 AUTO program sation 3 Recirculated air mode 8 Cooling function 4 Maximum cooling 9 Rear window defroster 5 Manual air distribution 10 Windshield heating 6 Temperature
101 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 102
CONTROLS Climate
Notes AUTO program Sufficient ventilation The AUTO program automati‐ When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐ cally adjusts the air distribution tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐ to the windshield and side win‐ nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recircu‐ dows, toward the upper body lated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in the area, and into the footwell. The interior continuously worsens.◀ air volume and your specifications for the tem‐ perature are adjusted to outside influences due to the seasons, e. g., solar radiation. Comfortable interior climate The cooling function is switched on automati‐ The AUTO program offers the optimum air dis‐ cally with the AUTO program. tribution and air volume for virtually all condi‐ tions, refer to AUTO program below. Select a The program is switched off if the air distribu‐ comfortable interior temperature only. tion is manually adjusted or the button is pressed again. The following sections contain more detailed information on the available setting options. Most of these settings are stored for the remote Recirculated air mode control in use, Personal Profile settings, refer to If the air outside the car has an page 31. unpleasant odor or contains pol‐ lutants, shut off the supply to the Air volume, manual interior of the car temporarily. Press the – button to reduce the The system then recirculates the air volume. Press the + button to air currently within the vehicle. increase the air volume. Should the windows fog up in the recirculated- The automatic mode for the air air mode, press the AUTO button or switch off volume can be switched on the recirculated-air mode and increase the air again using the AUTO button. volume if necessary. Make sure that air can flow onto the windshield. The air flow rate may be reduced or the blower may be switched off entirely to save on battery Recirculated air mode is automatically deacti‐ power. The display remains the same. vated at low external temperatures.
Switching the system on/off Maximum cooling Reduce the air volume by pressing the – button Automatic climate control until the system is switched off. All displays go switches to the lowest tempera‐ out. ture, a high air volume, and re‐ circulated air mode. Press the AUTO button to switch the automatic climate control back on. For maximum cooling, open the vents for the upper body area.
The air is cooled as quickly as possible: ▷ At an external temperature above 32 ℉/0 ℃. ▷ When the engine is running.
102 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 103
Climate CONTROLS
Manual air distribution Windshield heating The flow of air is directed, as se‐ The windshield heating switches lected, to the windows, to the off automatically after some upper body area, or to the foot‐ time. well. The automatic mode for the air distribution can be switched back on using the AUTO button. Cooling function The cooling function cools and Temperature dehumidifies the incoming air before reheating it as required, Set the desired temperature in‐ according to the temperature dividually. setting. The passenger compart‐ The automatic climate control ment can only be cooled with the engine run‐ achieves this temperature as ning. quickly as possible regardless of the season, using maximum cooling or heating The cooling function helps to prevent conden‐ power if necessary, and then maintains it. sation on the windows or to remove it quickly. Depending on the weather, the windshield may When switching between different temperature fog up briefly when the engine is started. Recir‐ settings in rapid succession, the automatic cli‐ culated air mode is switched on automatically if mate control does not have sufficient time to necessary. adjust the set temperature. The cooling function is switched on automati‐ cally when the AUTO button is pressed. Rear window defroster The rear window defroster Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter switches off automatically after a The microfilter traps dust and pollen. The acti‐ certain period of time. vated-charcoal filter provides additional protec‐ tion by filtering gaseous pollutants from the outside air. The service center replaces this Depending on the vehicle equipment, upper combined filter during routine maintenance. wires are used as an antenna and are not part of the rear window defroster.
Defrosting and defogging windows Quickly removes ice and con‐ densation from the windshield and front side windows. For this purpose, also switch on the cool‐ ing function. The windshield heating switches on automati‐ cally.
103 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 104
CONTROLS Climate
Ventilation
1 Knob for continuous opening and closing 2 Nozzle for direction of air flow
Opening/closing Turn the knob.
Direction of air flow Pivot the entire nozzle.
104 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 105
Interior equipment CONTROLS
Interior equipment
Vehicle equipment Compatibility If this symbol is printed on the packag‐ This chapter describes all series equipment as ing or in the operating instructions of well as country-specific and special equipment the system being operated, the system offered for this model series. Therefore, it also is generally compatible with the universal ga‐ describes equipment that may not be found in rage door opener. your vehicle, for instance due to the selected If you have any questions, please contact: special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ ▷ Your service center. tems. ▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet. When using the features and systems described HomeLink is a registered trademark of the here, adhere to local regulations. Gentex Corporation.
Controls on the interior rearview mirror Universal garage door opener
The concept The universal garage door opener can be used to operate up to 3 functions in remote-control‐ led systems, such as garage door drives or lighting systems. The universal garage door opener replaces up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To operate it, the buttons on the 1 LED interior rearview mirror must be programmed 2 Buttons for the desired functions. The hand-held trans‐ 3 Hand-held transmitter, required for pro‐ mitter for the system is needed for the pro‐ gramming. gramming procedure. During programming Programming During programming and before activat‐ ing a device using the Universal Garage Door General information Opener, ensure that there are no people, ani‐ 1. Switch on the ignition. mals, or objects in the range of movement of the remote-controlled device; otherwise, there 2. Initial setup: is a risk of injury or damage. Press the right and left buttons on the inte‐ Also follow the safety instructions of the hand- rior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐ held transmitter.◀ prox. 20 seconds until the LED on the inte‐ rior rearview mirror begins to flash. All Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored programmed settings of the buttons on the functions for security reasons. interior rearview mirror are deleted.
105 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 106
CONTROLS Interior equipment
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter of the sys‐ In systems with an alternating-code system, the tem to be operated a distance of approx. 1 universal garage door opener and the system to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons must be additionally synchronized. on the interior rearview mirror. The re‐ Please obtain additional information on syn‐ quired distance depends on the particular chronization in the operating instructions of the hand-held transmitter. system being set up. 4. Press the button of the desired function on The systems will be easier to synchronize with the hand-held transmitter and the button the aid of a second person. being programmed on the interior rearview Synchronization: mirror simultaneously and hold. The LED on the interior rearview mirror flashes slowly at 1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐ first. mote-controlled system. 5. When the LED flashes more rapidly, release 2. Program the corresponding button on the both buttons. Rapid flashing indicates that interior rearview mirror as described. the button on the interior rearview mirror 3. Identify and press the synchronization but‐ has been programmed. ton on the system being set up. You have If the LED does not flash faster after 60 sec‐ approx. 30 seconds for the next step. onds, change the distance between the in‐ 4. Press and hold the button on the interior terior rearview mirror and the hand-held rearview mirror for approx. 3 seconds and transmitter and repeat the step. Multiple then release it. Repeat this step up to three trials at different distances may be neces‐ times if necessary to complete the synchro‐ sary. Wait at least 15 seconds between tri‐ nization procedure. When synchronization als. is completed, the programmed function is 6. To program additional functions on other executed. buttons, repeat steps 3 to 5. The systems can be operated with the buttons Reprogramming individual buttons on the interior rearview mirror. 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Hold the hand-held transmitter at a dis‐ Special characteristics of alternating- tance of approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm from code radio systems the memory buttons. If the system cannot be operated after re‐ The required distance depends on the par‐ peated programming, check whether the sys‐ ticular hand-held transmitter. tem to be operated uses an alternating-code system. 3. Press the memory button of the universal garage door opener. Read the operating instructions of the system or press and hold the programmed button on 4. If the LED flashes slowly after approx. the interior rearview mirror. If the LED on the 20 seconds, press the transmit button on interior rearview mirror flashes rapidly at first the hand-held transmitter. and then lights up continuously for 2 seconds, 5. Release both buttons when the LED flashes the system is equipped with an alternating- rapidly. code system. This flashing LED pattern repeats If the LED does not flash rapidly after ap‐ itself for approx. 20 seconds. prox. 60 seconds, change the distance and repeat the step.
106 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 107
Interior equipment CONTROLS
Canada: if the LED does not flash rapidly af‐ Folding up ter approx. 60 seconds, change the dis‐ Fold the sun visor up. tance and repeat the step. If programming was aborted by the hand-held transmitter, Glare protection from the side hold down the memory button and press and release the button on the hand-held Folding down transmitter several times for 2 seconds. 1. Fold the sun visor down. Controls 2. Detach from the holder and pivot sideways to the side window. Prior to operation Before operating a unit with the Universal Folding up Garage Door Opener, ensure that there are no To close the sun visor, proceed in reverse order. people, animals, or objects in the range of movement of the system; otherwise, there is a Vanity mirror risk of injury or damage. A vanity mirror is located behind a cover on Also follow the safety instructions of the hand- each sun visor. held transmitter.◀ To open, fold the cover up. The system, such as the garage door, can be Depending on the vehicle equipment, mirror operated using the button on the interior rear‐ lighting comes on when the cover is opened. view mirror with the engine running or the igni‐ tion switched on. When you are within the re‐ ception range of the system, press and hold the button until the function is initiated. The LED on Digital compass the interior rearview mirror lights up continu‐ ously while the radio signal is being transmit‐ ted.
Deleting stored functions Press the right and left buttons on the interior rearview mirror simultaneously for approx. 20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The functions can‐ not be deleted individually. 1 Adjustment button on the back of the mir‐ ror 2 Display Sun visor The display shows the main or secondary com‐ Glare protection pass direction in which the vehicle is traveling.
Folding down Operating concept Fold the sun visor down. Various functions can be called up by pressing the adjustment button with a pointed object such as a pen. The following adjustment op‐ tions are displayed one after the other, de‐
107 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 108
CONTROLS Interior equipment
pending on how long the adjustment button is ▷ 12 to 15 seconds: set the language. pressed: ▷ Press briefly: switch the display on/off. Setting compass zones ▷ 3 to 6 seconds: set the compass zone. Set the compass zone corresponding to the ve‐ hicle's geographic location so that the compass ▷ 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate the compass. can function correctly; refer to the world map ▷ 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right hand with compass zones. steering.
Press the adjustment button for 3‑4 seconds. ▷ The cardinal direction displayed does not The number of the compass zone set is shown change even if the direction of travel in the display. changes. To change the zone setting, briefly press the ▷ Not all compass directions are shown. adjustment button repeatedly until the display shows the number of the compass zone corre‐ Procedure sponding to the current location. 1. Make sure that there are no large metal ob‐ The compass is operational again after approx. jects or overhead power lines in the vicinity 10 seconds. of the vehicle and that there is enough space to drive in a circle. Calibrating the digital compass 2. Set the currently valid compass zone. The digital compass must be calibrated in the 3. Press the adjustment button for 6‑7 sec‐ following situations: onds to call up C. Then drive at least one full ▷ An incorrect compass direction is shown. circle at a maximum speed of 4 mph/7 km/h. When the system is cali‐ brated, the C is replaced by the compass di‐ rections.
108 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 109
Interior equipment CONTROLS
Right-hand/left-hand steering The digital compass is set for right-hand or left- hand steering at the factory.
Setting the language Press the adjustment button for 12‑13 seconds. Briefly press the adjustment button again to switch between English "E" and German "O". The setting is automatically saved after approx. Depending on the equipment, additional cu‐ 10 seconds. pholders can be installed on the center rail. Shatter-proof containers and no hot Cupholders and ashtray/ drinks lighter Use light and shatter-proof containers and do not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is the increased danger of injury in an accident.◀
Unsuitable containers Do not forcefully push unsuitable contain‐ ers into the cupholders. This may result in dam‐ age.◀
Ashtray The ashtray is located in one of the cupholders in the center console at the front. Cupholders Two cupholders are located in the center con‐ Emptying sole in the front. Take out the entire ashtray, arrow. MINI Countryman: two additional cupholders When installing, ensure that the ashtray is in‐ are located at the end of the center console in serted in the cupholder with the adapter. the rear. Additional cupholders can be installed on the center rail. Lighter
MINI Paceman: additional cupholders are lo‐ With the engine running or the ignition cated in the console between the rear seats. switched on, press in the cigarette lighter.
109 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 110
CONTROLS Interior equipment
The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops Socket in the rear back out. MINI Countryman Danger of burns Only hold the hot lighter by its head; oth‐ erwise, there is the danger of getting burned. Switch off the ignition and take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children cannot use the lighter and burn themselves.◀
Connecting electrical de‐ Take out the cover. vices MINI Paceman The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment while the engine is run‐ ning or when the ignition is switched on. The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volt. Avoid damaging the sockets by attempting to insert plugs of unsuitable shape or size. Do not connect the charger to the socket Do not connect the battery charger to the socket installed in the vehicle at the factory as Take out the cover. this could damage the battery.◀
Replace the cover after use Socket in the cargo area Replace the lighter or socket cover after MINI Countryman use; otherwise, objects that fall into the lighter socket or power socket could cause a short cir‐ cuit.◀
Socket in the center console Remove the cover or lighter, refer to page 109, from the socket.
Take out the cover.
110 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 111
Interior equipment CONTROLS
MINI Paceman
MINI Paceman: Take out the cover.
Cargo area
Cargo cover Do not place objects on the covers Do not place objects on the cover; if you do so, they may pose a danger to vehicle occu‐ MINI Countryman: rear seat backrests pants during braking or evasive maneuvers or damage the cover.◀ Danger of pinching Before folding down the rear seat back‐ Move the cover into position rests, ensure that path of movement of the When closing, ensure that the cargo cover backrests is clear. Especially when the middle is resting on the rubber buffers of the securing section is folded down, ensure that no one is straps; otherwise, damage may occur when located in or reaches into the path of move‐ closing the tailgate.◀ ment of the rear seat backrests. Otherwise, in‐ When the tailgate is opened, the cargo cover is juries or damage may result.◀ raised. Observe the instructions concerning the To load bulky luggage, the cover can be re‐ safety belt moved. Observe the instructions concerning the safety 1. Detach the securing straps from the tail‐ belt, refer to page 46. Otherwise, personal pro‐ gate. tection may be compromised.◀ 2. Lift the cover slightly, arrow 1, and pull it The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of back and out of the bracket, arrow 2. 40-20-40. MINI Countryman: When the outer rear seat backrests are folded down, it is not permissible for a person to travel on the center seat. Remove the third head restraint, refer to page 49, if necessary.
111 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 112
CONTROLS Interior equipment
Open the center safety belt and insert it in the When the backrests are folded back up, they belt holder on the headliner, refer to page 47. engage in the transport position. Enlarge the cargo area by adjusting the rear To set the desired backrest inclination or com‐ seat backrests to a more upright position. fort position, hold the backrest, pull the loop The backrests can be adjusted to 10 different forward, and adjust the backrest. positions between the comfort and transport positions and they can be folded down. MINI Paceman: rear seat backrests In the comfort position, the backrests are tilted Danger of pinching back to the greatest possible angle and in the Before folding down the rear seat back‐ transport position they are nearly vertical. rests, ensure that path of movement of the Before beginning with the mounting of a child backrests is clear; otherwise, injuries or damage restraint fixing system, note the instructions, may result.◀ refer to page 52. 1. Fold the belt buckles down. 1. Hold the top of the backrest, for example the head restraint, and pull on the loop, ar‐ row.
2. Pull on the respective loop, arrow. The backrest is unlocked.
2. Engage the backrest in the desired position or fold it down.
Folding the backrests back up Locking the backrest When folding back, ensure that the locks engage properly; otherwise, cargo could be catapulted forward into the passenger com‐ partment during braking maneuvers and 3. Fold the backrest forward. swerving, endangering the occupants.◀
No child restraint fixing systems Folding the backrests back up Hold the top of the backrest, for example the Do not mount child restraint fixing sys‐ head restraint, and fold it back. tems in the rear when the rear seat backrests are adjusted to a more vertical position; other‐ Locking the backrest wise, the protection provided by these systems When folding back, ensure that the locks may be reduced.◀ engage properly; otherwise, cargo could be catapulted forward into the passenger com‐
112 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 113
Interior equipment CONTROLS
partment during braking maneuvers and Removing swerving, endangering the occupants.◀ The loading floor can be removed if necessary. 1. Fold up the loading floor. Flat loading floor 2. Pull it back slightly and out of the holders. Maximum load 3. Then remove it upward. Do not exceed the maximum load of 330 lbs, 150 kg, on the loading floor; otherwise, The folded loading floor can be stored in the damage may result.◀ cargo area. MINI Countryman: partition net Access to storage area Firmly attach the partition net A storage area for items like the partition net is found under the loading floor. Make sure that the partition net is firmly attached; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ 1. Reach into the recess, arrow 1, on the rear edge of the loading floor. Before installing 2. Lift the loading floor at the rear, arrow 1, 1. Remove the pouch with the partition net and fold it forward, arrow 2. from the storage compartment under the MINI Countryman: loading floor in the cargo area. 2. Take the partition net out of the pouch, un‐ roll it, and unfold it. After use, fold and roll up the partition net in the same manner and place it in the pouch so that it can be stowed back under the cargo floor panel. Ensure that hooks and tensioning buckles do not rest on the rod elements. 3. Unfold the partition net to the point where MINI Paceman: the rod elements engage.
Installation behind the front seats
Before closing the tailgate, lower the loading floor back onto the cargo area floor. 1. Take out the cargo cover if necessary. 2. Fold down the rear seat backrests, refer to Enlarging the cargo area.
113 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 114
CONTROLS Interior equipment
3. Insert the retaining pins of the partition net Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it all the way into the front holders in the has been appropriately secured.◀ headliner, arrow 1, and push forward. 4. Attach the hooks, arrow 2, at the bottom of the retaining straps on both sides to the eyelets on the vehicle floor. 5. Lash the partition net tightly. To do this, tighten the retaining straps using the ten‐ sioning buckles.
Removing To remove and stow the partition net, proceed in reverse order.
To fold up, press the release button, arrow.
MINI Countryman: multi-function hook
Hooks designed for hanging shopping bags and totes, for example, are located on the left and right sides of the cargo cover support, arrow.
Do not hang heavy items from the hooks Only hang light bags or suitable objects from the holders. Otherwise, there is a danger of objects flying about during braking and eva‐ sive maneuvers.
114 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 115
Storage compartments CONTROLS
Storage compartments
Vehicle equipment ▷ Cupholders, refer to page 109. ▷ Clothes hooks, refer to page 117. This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment Cargo area offered for this model series. Therefore, it also ▷ Lashing eyes, refer to page 126. describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected ▷ Storage compartment under the flat load‐ special equipment or the country version. This ing floor, refer to page 113. also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ ▷ Multi-function hook on the cargo cover tems. support, refer to page 114. When using the features and systems described here, adhere to local regulations. Glove compartment
Notes Opening No loose objects in the passenger com‐ partment Do not stow any objects in the passenger com‐ partment without securing them; otherwise, they may present a danger to occupants for in‐ stance during braking and avoidance maneu‐ vers.◀
No non-slip mats on the dashboard Do not use non-slip materials, such as Pull the handle to open the lid. non-slip mats, on the dashboard, or it could be The light in the glove compartment switches damaged by the substances in the materials.◀ on.
Closing Storage compartments Fold up the cover.
Interior Close the glove compartment again im‐ mediately ▷ Glove compartment, refer to page 115. Close the glove compartment immediately after ▷ Center armrest, refer to page 116. use while driving; otherwise, injury may occur ▷ Center rail, refer to page 116. during accidents.◀ ▷ Compartments in the center console. ▷ Compartments in the doors. ▷ Pockets on the back of the front seat back‐ rests.
115 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 116
CONTROLS Storage compartments
USB interface for data transfer Do not use accessory parts in the area of the Updating the navigation data, refer to parking brake; otherwise, they may become page 132, from the USB medium via the USB damaged when the parking brake lever is acti‐ interface in the glove compartment. vated. Observe the following when connecting: Base plate ▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐ Various accessory parts such as cupholders can nector into the USB interface. be mounted on the base plate. ▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or lamps to the USB interface. Inserting the base plate ▷ Do not connect USB hard drives. The lever 3 can be engaged in three positions. ▷ Do not use the USB interface to recharge external devices.
Center armrest The center armrest between the front seats contains a storage compartment or a cover for the snap-in adapter, refer to page 198, de‐ pending on the equipment. 0 Setting Do not position tall accessory parts directly on the center rail of the center armrest; otherwise, 1 Adjusting the position on the rail they may be damaged when the center arm‐ 2 Inserting the base plate rest is opened or closed. To insert, move the lever to position 2. Center armrest front Adjusting the position and fixing Opening 1. Push lever 3 into position 1. Press the button, arrow, and pull up the lid. 2. Adjust the position of the base plate. 3. Push lever 3 downward into position 0. Do not apply excessive pressure to the lever. The base plate is fixed. Fix the base plate Fix the base plate before driving away; otherwise, injuries may result during an acci‐ dent.◀
Center rail Various accessory parts can be mounted on the center rail and moved to different positions.
116 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 117
Storage compartments CONTROLS
Clothes hooks Clothes hooks are located on the grab handles in the rear. Do not obstruct view When suspending clothing from the hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driv‐ er's vision.◀
No heavy objects Do not hang heavy objects from the hooks; otherwise, they may present a danger to passengers during braking and evasive ma‐ neuvers.◀
Connection for an exter‐ nal audio device
This can be used to connect an external audio device, refer to page 167, such as a CD or MP3 player.
117 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15
DRIVE ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATION
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 120
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle equipment Tires Due to technical factors associated with their This chapter describes all series equipment as manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac‐ well as country-specific and special equipment tion potential until after an initial breaking-in offered for this model series. Therefore, it also period. describes equipment that may not be found in Drive conservatively for the first your vehicle, for instance due to the selected 200 miles/300 km. special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. Brake system Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐ When using the features and systems described prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized here, adhere to local regulations. contact and wear patterns between brake pads and discs. Drive cautiously during this break-in Breaking-in period period. Clutch General information The clutch requires an initial break-in period of Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to approx. 300 miles/500 km to function at an op‐ each other. timal level. The following instructions will help achieve a During this break-in period, engage the clutch long vehicle life and good economy. gently.
Engine and differential Following part replacement Always obey all official speed limits. The same breaking in procedures should be ob‐ served if any of the components mentioned Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km above have to be renewed in the course of the Drive at various engine and vehicle speeds, but vehicle's operating life. do not exceed: ▷ For a gasoline engine, 4,500 rpm and 100 mph/160 km/h. General driving notes Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the transmission's kickdown mode for the initial Ground clearance miles. Ensure adequate ground clearance Ensure adequate ground clearance, e.g., From 1,200 miles/2,000 km when driving into underground garages, when The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be driving over curbs, or when driving in winter; increased. otherwise, damage may occur to the vehicle.◀
120 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 121
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
Closing the tailgate ated during transmission will be discharged from the vehicle interior.◀ Drive with the tailgate closed Only drive with the tailgate closed; other‐ Hydroplaning wise, passengers and other road users may be endangered or the vehicle may be damaged if On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can an accident occurs or during braking or swerv‐ form between the tires and road surface. ing. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐ passenger compartment.◀ ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road If, despite this, the vehicle must be driven with surface, ultimately undermining your ability to the tailgate open: steer and brake the vehicle. ▷ Drive moderately. Hydroplaning ▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof. When driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐ ▷ Switch off recirculated air mode and greatly duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀ increase the blower speed. The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tire Hot exhaust system tread depth decreases. Minimum tread depth, refer to page 222. Hot exhaust system High temperatures are generated in the Driving through water exhaust system. Drive though calm water only if it is not deeper Do not remove the heat shields installed and than 12 inches/30 cm and at this height, no never apply undercoating to them. Make sure faster than walking speed, up to that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves, 6 mph/10 km/h. grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hot exhaust system during driving, while in idle po‐ Using the parking brake on inclines sition mode, or when parked. Such contact could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of seri‐ Using the parking brake ous personal injury as well as property damage. On inclines, do not hold the vehicle sta‐ Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, tionary with a slipping clutch for extended pe‐ there is the danger of getting burned.◀ riod; use the parking brake instead. Otherwise, the clutch will be subject to increased wear.◀ Mobile communication devices in the Support from the hill drive-off assistant, refer to vehicle page 94. Mobile communication devices in the ve‐ Braking safely hicle The vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard It is not recommended to use mobile phones, feature. such as mobile phones without a direct con‐ nection to an external aerial in the vehicle's Applying the brakes fully is the most effective passenger compartment. Otherwise, the vehi‐ way of braking in situations when this is neces‐ cle electronics and mobile communication de‐ sary. vices can interfere with each other. In addition, The vehicle maintains steering responsiveness. there is no assurance that the radiation gener‐ You can still avoid any obstacles with a mini‐ mum of steering effort.
121 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 122
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from You can increase the engine's braking effect by the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if active mode. necessary. Do not let your foot rest on the brake Downshifting in manual mode of the Steptronic pedal transmission, refer to page 65. Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake Avoid load on the brakes pedal. Even light but consistent pedal pressure Avoid placing excessive load on the brake can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and system. Light but consistent brake pressure can possibly even brake failure.◀ lead to high temperatures, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.◀ Objects in the area around the pedals Do not drive in neutral No objects in the area around the pedals Never drive with the transmission in neu‐ Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other tral, with the engine switched off or with the objects out of the area of motion of the pedals; clutch depressed; otherwise, you will have nei‐ otherwise, the function of the pedals could be ther the braking action of the engine or nor its impeded while driving power assistance when braking or steering.◀ Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects. Brake disc corrosion Only use floor mats that have been approved Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐ for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in tion on the brake pads are furthered by: place. ▷ Low mileage. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened ▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not again when they are returned after being re‐ used at all. moved, such as for cleaning.◀ ▷ Infrequent use of the brakes. Driving in wet conditions Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure that must be exerted by the pads during brake When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, applications to clean the discs is not reached. briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every few miles. Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef‐ Ensure that this action does not endanger other fect that generally cannot be corrected. road users. The heat generated in this process helps dry When the vehicle is parked the brake discs and pads. When using the automatic climate control, con‐ In this way braking efficiency will be available densation water develops that exits under‐ when you need it. neath the vehicle. Therefore, traces of condensed water under the Hills vehicle are normal. Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the After the engine is switched off, the coolant gear in which the least braking is required. Oth‐ pump may continue running for some time in erwise, the brake system may overheat, result‐ the MINI Cooper S. This causes noises in the en‐ ing in a reduction in the brake system effi‐ gine compartment. ciency.
122 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 123
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
Driving on poor roads After driving on poor roads Your MINI with ALL4 all-wheel drive feels com‐ Adhere to the following points to ensure vehi‐ fortable on all streets and roads. It combines an cle safety: all-wheel drive system with the advantages of a ▷ Remove excessive accumulations of dirt normal passenger car. and mud from the vehicle body. Do not drive on unpaved terrain ▷ Clear mud, snow, ice, etc., from the wheels Do not drive on unpaved terrain, as oth‐ and tires and check for damage. erwise the vehicle may be damaged.◀ For your own safety and the safety of passen‐ gers and the vehicle, adhere to the following points: ▷ Familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving; never take risks. ▷ Adjust speeds according to road conditions. The steeper and rougher the road surface is, the lower the speed should be. ▷ When driving on steep uphill and downhill grades: the engine oil and coolant should be filled nearly to the MAX mark. ▷ Watch for stones, holes, and other obsta‐ cles and drive around these where possible. ▷ On bumps and rough roads, avoid contact between the vehicle body and the ground. The maximum ground clearance is 6 in‐ ches/15 cm and may vary with the loaded cargo. ▷ When driving through water, do not exceed the maximum water height of 12 in‐ ches/30 cm and drive at walking speed. ▷ After driving through water, press on the brake pedal several times at low speeds to dry the brakes. ▷ Depending on the prevailing terrain, acti‐ vate Dynamic Traction Control DTC briefly, refer to page 93. ▷ When the wheels spin, accelerate to enable the driving stability control systems to dis‐ tribute the drive force to the individual wheels.
123 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 124
DRIVING TIPS Loading
Loading
Vehicle equipment Determining the load This chapter describes all series equipment as limit well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series. Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using the features and systems described here, adhere to local regulations. 1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐ hicle's placard: General information ▷ The combined weight of occupants and Overloading the vehicle cargo should never exceed XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the ve‐ To avoid exceeding the approved carry‐ hicle and unstable driving situations ing capacity of the tires, never overload the ve‐ may result. hicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and increases the rate at which damage develops 2. Determine the combined weight of the inside the tires. This could result in a sudden driver and passengers that will be riding in loss of tire inflation pressure.◀ your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver No fluids in the cargo area and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY Make sure that fluids do not leak into the pounds. cargo area; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐ 4. The resulting figure equals the available aged.◀ amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐ pacity. For example, if the YYY amount equals 1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs pas‐ sengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs = 400 lbs. 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the
124 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 125
Loading DRIVING TIPS
available cargo and luggage load capacity ▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward and as calculated in Step 4. low as possible, ideally directly behind the 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load backrests. from your trailer will be transfered to your ▷ Cover sharp edges and corners. vehicle. Consult the manual for transporting ▷ Do not pile cargo higher than the top edge a trailer to determine how this may reduce of the backrests. the available cargo and luggage load ca‐ ▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests pacity of your vehicle. to stow cargo. ▷ Use the partition net, refer to page 113, to Load protect passengers. Make sure that objects cannot penetrate the partition net. 4-seater: ▷ Place protective material around any sharp- edged or pointed objects that could bump against the rear window while the vehicle is in motion.
MINI Countryman
5-seater:
MINI Paceman
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo. The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing cargo ▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle.
125 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 126
DRIVING TIPS Loading
Securing cargo Securing cargo Stow and secure the cargo as described Lashing eyes in the cargo area above; otherwise it may present a danger to the occupants, for instance during braking and MINI Countryman avoidance maneuvers. Do not stow any heavy and hard objects in the passenger compartment without securing them; otherwise, they may present a danger to occupants, for instance during braking and avoidance maneuvers. Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle weight or either of the approved axle loads, as excessive loads can pose a safety hazard, and may also place you in violation of traffic safety laws. MINI Paceman Do not secure cargo using the upper LATCH mounting points, refer to page 54; otherwise, these may become damaged.◀
Roof-mounted luggage rack
Notes A special rack system is available as an optional Securing cargo accessory. ▷ Secure smaller and lighter pieces with tight‐ Attachment ening belts or straps. Follow the installation instructions for the roof- ▷ Secure larger and heavier pieces with cargo mounted luggage rack. straps. Ensure that adequate clearance is available for Adhere to the information included with the movement of the glass sunroof. the cargo straps. ▷ Eight mounting eyes are available for fas‐ Loading tening the cargo straps. Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of Two of them are located on the side wall of gravity when loaded, they have a major effect the cargo area, arrows 1, and two are lo‐ on vehicle handling and steering response. cated on the rear wall of the cargo area, ar‐ Therefore, note the following when loading and rows 2. driving: ▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads and the approved gross vehicle weight.
126 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 127
Loading DRIVING TIPS
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly. ▷ The roof load should not be too large in area. ▷ Always load the heaviest pieces on the bot‐ tom. ▷ Fasten the roof-mounted luggage securely, for instance using lashing straps. ▷ Do not let objects project into the opening path of the tailgate. The anchorage points are under the covers in ▷ Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration the bumper. and braking maneuvers. Take corners gen‐ Push out the covers on the corresponding cut‐ tly. outs.
Loading Rear luggage rack When loading the vehicle, ensure that the ap‐ proved gross vehicle weight and the axle loads Notes are not exceeded. Adhere to the weight specifi‐ A special rear rack is available as an optional cations in the technical data. accessory. It does not require a trailer hitch. Follow the installation instructions for the rear rack.
Anchorage points MINI Countryman:
MINI Paceman:
127 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 128
DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel
Saving fuel
Vehicle equipment Check the tire inflation pressure regularly This chapter describes all series equipment as Check and, if necessary, correct the tire infla‐ well as country-specific and special equipment tion pressure, refer to page 216, at least twice offered for this model series. Therefore, it also a month and before starting on a long trip. describes equipment that may not be found in Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐ your vehicle, for instance due to the selected sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and special equipment or the country version. This tire wear. also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. Drive away without delay When using the features and systems described Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while here, adhere to local regulations. the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds. This is the fastest way for the cold engine to General information reach its operating temperature. Your vehicle contains advanced technology for the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐ Look well ahead when driving sions. Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. To Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐ achieve this, maintain a suitable distance to the ferent factors. The implementation of certain vehicle driving ahead of you. measures, driving style and regular mainte‐ Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces nance can have an influence on fuel consump‐ fuel consumption. tion and on the environmental impact. Avoid high engine speeds Remove unnecessary cargo Use 1st gear to get the vehicle in motion. Be‐ Additional weight increases fuel consumption. ginning with 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When accelerating, shift up before reaching high en‐ Remove attached parts following use gine speeds. Remove unneeded auxiliary mirrors, roof or When you reach the desired speed, shift into rear luggage racks after use. the highest applicable gear and drive with the Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐ engine speed as low as possible and at a con‐ dynamics and increase the fuel consumption. stant speed. As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers Close both windows fuel consumption and reduces wear. Open windows causes higher air resistance and thus increases fuel consumption. Use coasting conditions When approaching a red light, take your foot off the accelerator and coast to a halt in the highest applicable gear.
128 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 129
Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS
On a downhill slope, take your foot off the ac‐ celerator and coast in a suitable gear. The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Switch off the engine during longer stops Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g., at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic congestion. Fuel savings are already achieved after the en‐ gine is turned off for as little as 4 seconds.
Switch off any functions that are not currently needed Functions such as seat heating and the rear window defroster require a lot of energy and consume additional fuel, especially in city and stop-and-go traffic. Therefore, switch off these functions if they are not actually needed.
Have maintenance carried out Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle economy and operating life. Have the maintenance carried out by the serv‐ ice center. Please also note the MINI maintenance system, refer to page 233.
129 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15
FOLLOW ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATION
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 132
NAVIGATION Navigation system
Navigation system
Vehicle equipment During destination guidance, the arrow or map view appears on the Control Display. This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series. Therefore, it also Navigation data describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected Information on navigation data special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ 1. "Navigation" tems. 2. Open "Options". When using the features and systems described 3. "Navigation system version" here, adhere to local regulations. Information is displayed on the data ver‐ sion.
General information Updating the navigation data
The navigation system can determine the pre‐ General information cise position of the vehicle, with the aid of sat‐ Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and ellites and vehicle sensors, and can reliably can be updated. guide you to every entered destination. Current navigation data and the authorization Entries in stationary vehicle code are available from your service center. Enter data only when the vehicle is sta‐ ▷ Depending on the data volume, a data up‐ tionary, and always give priority to the applica‐ date may take several hours. ble traffic regulations in the event of any con‐ tradiction between traffic and road conditions ▷ Update during the trip to preserve battery. and the instructions issued by the navigation ▷ The status of the update can be viewed. system. Failure to take to this precaution can ▷ The data are stored in the vehicle. place you in violation of the law and put vehicle ▷ After the updating process is complete, the occupants and other road users in danger.◀ system restarts. ▷ Remove the medium with the navigation Opening the navigation system data after the update. 1. "Navigation" Performing the update 1. Depending on the equipment: insert the USB device with the navigation data into the USB interface in the glove compartment or in the USB audio interface. 2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ play.
132 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 133
Navigation system NAVIGATION
3. Enter the authorization code of the USB de‐ vice with the navigation data. 4. Drive off. The update starts after the authorization code is entered. When the update is completed, the system re‐ starts.
133 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 134
NAVIGATION Destination entry
Destination entry
Vehicle equipment Stored town/city and street names can be called up quickly. This chapter describes all series equipment as ▷ If the existing entries should not be well as country-specific and special equipment changed, the entries for the state/province offered for this model series. Therefore, it also and town/city can be skipped. describes equipment that may not be found in ▷ Destination guidance is started to the town/ your vehicle, for instance due to the selected city center if no street is entered. special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. Entering a state/province 1. "Navigation" When using the features and systems described here, adhere to local regulations. 2. "Enter address"
At a glance In entering your destination, it is possible to se‐ lect from the following options: ▷ Enter the destination manually, see below. ▷ Select the destination from the address book, refer to page 136. ▷ Last destinations, refer to page 137. 3. Select "State/Province" or the displayed ▷ Special destinations, refer to page 138. state/province. ▷ Destination entry via map, refer to Entering a town/city page 139. 1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis‐ ▷ Using the home address as the destination, played town/city. refer to page 137. ▷ Destination entry by voice, refer to page 140.
Manual destination en‐ try
General information The system supports you in entering street 2. Select letters, if necessary. names and house numbers by automatically The list is narrowed down further with each completing the entry and providing entry com‐ entry. parisons, refer to page 23.
134 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 135
Destination entry NAVIGATION
3. Move the MINI joystick to the right. Street does not exist in the destination 4. Select the name of the town/city from the city/town list. The desired street does not exist in the speci‐ If there are several towns/cities with the same fied city/town because it belongs to another name: part of the city/town. 1. Change to the list of town/city names. 1. "Navigation" 2. Highlight the town/city. 2. "Enter address" 3. Select the town/city. 3. Select "Street" or the displayed street. 4. Change to the list of street names. Entering the postal code 5. Select "In" with the state/province currently 1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis‐ displayed. played town/city. All streets of the selected state/province are 2. Select the symbol. offered. The associated town/city is dis‐ 3. Select the digits individually. played after the street name. 4. Change to the list of postal codes and towns/cities. 5. Highlight the entry. 6. Selecting an entry. The associated destination town/city is dis‐ played.
Entering a street and intersection 1. Select "Street" or the displayed street. 6. Select the letters. 2. Enter a street and intersection in the same 7. Change to the list of street names. way as you would enter a town/city. 8. Highlight the street. If there are several streets with the same name: 9. Select the street. 1. Change to the list of street names. 2. Highlight the street. Starting destination guidance after entering the destination 3. Select the street. 1. "Accept destination" Alternative: enter the street address 2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another and house number destination" 1. Select "Street" or the displayed street. 2. Enter the street as you would the town/city. 3. "House number" 4. Select the numbers. 5. Change to the list of house numbers. 6. Select a house number or range of house numbers.
135 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 136
NAVIGATION Destination entry
Add, refer to page 142, a destination as a Storing the destination in the address further destination. book After entering the destination, store the desti‐ nation in the address book. 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Guidance" 4. Open "Options". 5. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing contact"
Address book Create contacts, refer to page 185.
Selecting a destination from the address book 1. "Navigation" 2. "Address book" 6. Select an existing contact, if available. Contacts with addresses are displayed if these addresses have been checked as des‐ 7. "Business address" or "Home address" tinations in the contacts. 8. Enter "Last name" and, if necessary, "First If the contacts with addresses from the mo‐ name". bile phone are not displayed, they first 9. "Store in vehicle" need to be checked as destinations, refer to page 187. Storing the position The current position can be stored in the ad‐ dress book. 1. "Navigation" 2. Open "Options".
3. Select a contact in the list or, if desired, with "A-Z search". 4. "Business address" or "Home address"
136 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 137
Destination entry NAVIGATION
3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position 3. "Home" to contact"
4. "Start guidance" 4. Depending on the selection, choose an ex‐ isting contact from the list. Select the type of address and enter the first and last Last destinations name. 5. "Store in vehicle" At a glance The destinations previously entered are stored Editing or deleting an address automatically. These destinations can be called 1. "Navigation" up and used as a destination for destination 2. "Address book" guidance. 3. Highlight the entry. Calling up the last destination 4. Open "Options". 1. "Navigation" 5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry" 2. "Last destinations"
Using the home address as the Starting destination guidance destination 1. "Navigation" The home address must be stored. Specify the home address, refer to page 186. 2. "Last destinations" 3. Select the destination. 1. "Navigation" 4. "Start guidance" 2. "Address book"
137 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 138
NAVIGATION Destination entry
Editing the destination 5. Select the category. Destinations can be edited, for example to 6. "Category details" change the house number of an existing entry. For some Points of Interest, it may be possi‐ 1. "Navigation" ble to select multiple category details. Move the MINI joystick to the left to leave 2. "Last destinations" the category details. 3. Highlight the destination. 7. "Keyword" 4. Open "Options". 8. Enter the keyword. 5. "Edit destination" A list of the Points of Interest is displayed. Deleting the last destinations 9. Select a special destination. 1. "Navigation" Details are displayed. 2. "Last destinations" If multiple details are stored, you can leaf through the pages. 3. Highlight the destination. If a phone number is available, a connec‐ 4. Open "Options". tion can be established if necessary. 5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last 10. Select the symbol. destinations" 11. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination" Special destinations Add a destination as a further destination, refer to page 142. General information Category search Even with the latest navigation data, informa‐ tion on individual Points of Interest may have 1. "Category search" changed; for example, gas stations might not 2. "Search destination" be in operation. 3. Select or enter the town/city. 4. "Category" Opening the search for Points of Interest 5. Select the category. Selection of Points of Interest, such as hotels or 6. "Category details" tourist attractions. For some Points of Interest, it may be possi‐ ble to select multiple category details. 1. "Navigation" Move the MINI joystick to the left to leave 2. "Points of Interest" the category details. 3. Select the search function. 7. "Start search" A list of the Points of Interest is displayed. A-Z search 8. Select a special destination. 1. "A-Z search" Details are displayed. 2. "Town/City" If multiple details are stored, you can leaf 3. Select or enter the town/city. through the pages. 4. "Category"
138 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 139
Destination entry NAVIGATION
If a phone number is available, a connec‐ bols. The display depends on the map tion can be established if necessary. scale and the category. 9. Select the symbol. 3. Highlight the special destination. 10. "Start guidance" or "Add as another 4. Select a special destination. destination" 5. Select the symbol. Add a destination as a further destination, 6. "Start guidance" or "Add as another refer to page 142. destination" The direct distance to destination is dis‐ Position of Points of Interest played. When entering the search location, various op‐ tions can be selected. Displaying Points of Interest in the map ▷ "At current location" To display symbols of the Points of Interest in ▷ "At destination" the map view: ▷ "At different location" 1. "Navigation" ▷ If destination guidance is active: "Along 2. "Map" route" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Display Points of Interest"
Starting the search for Points of Interest 1. "Start search" 5. Select the setting. 2. A list of the Points of Interest is displayed. ▷ "At current location" Destination entry by map The Points of Interest are listed accord‐ ing to their distance and are displayed General information with a directional arrow pointing to the If only the location of the destination town/city destination. or street is known, the destination can be en‐ ▷ "At destination", "At different location", tered using the map. "Along route" Special destinations are listed according Selecting the destination to their distance from the location 1. "Navigation" where the search is being performed. 2. "Map" ▷ Destinations of the selected category The current position of the vehicle is dis‐ are displayed in the map view as sym‐ played on the map.
139 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 140
NAVIGATION Destination entry
3. "Interactive map"
▷ Select the symbol. 4. Select the destination with crosshairs. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination" ▷ To change the scale: turn the MINI joy‐ stick. ▷ "Exit interactive map": return to the map view. ▷ To shift the map: move the MINI joy‐ stick in the required direction. ▷ Map view ▷ To shift the map diagonally: move the ▷ "Display destination": the map section MINI joystick in the required direction around the destination is displayed. and turn the MINI joystick. ▷ "Display current location": the map section 5. Press the MINI joystick to display additional around your current location is displayed. menu items. ▷ "Find points of interest": the search for ▷ Select the symbol: "Start guidance" Points of Interest is started. or "Add as another destination". ▷ "Find points of interest": the search for Points of Interest is started. Destination entry by voice Specifying the street If the system does not recognize the street, one General information of the following pieces of information is dis‐ ▷ Instructions for voice activation system, re‐ played: fer to page 24. ▷ A street name in the vicinity. ▷ When making a destination entry by voice, ▷ The coordinates of the destination. you can change between voice activation and the onboard monitor. Additional functions ▷ To have the available spoken instructions On the interactive map, the scale can be ad‐ read out loud: ›Voice commands‹. justed and the map section can be shifted. Pressing the MINI joysticks makes additional Saying the entries functions available: ▷ Countries, towns and cities, streets, and in‐ tersections can be said as whole words or spelled in the language of the system, refer to page 72.
140 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 141
Destination entry NAVIGATION
Example: to enter a town/city in a US states Turn the MINI joystick until the destination as a whole word, the language of the sys‐ town/city is selected and press the tem must be English. MINI joystick. ▷ Spell the entry if the spoken language and the language of the system differ. Entering a street or intersection separately ▷ Say the letters smoothly, and avoid exag‐ gerating the pronunciation and inserting Enter a street and intersection in the same way lengthy pauses between the letters. as you would enter a town/city. ▷ The methods of entry depend on the navi‐ Entering a house number separately gation data in use and the country and lan‐ guage settings. Depending on the data in the navigation sys‐ tem, house numbers up to number 2,000 can Entering a town/city separately be entered. The town/city can be said as a complete word. 1. ›House number‹ 2. Say the house number. 1. Press the button on the steering 3. ›Yes‹ to confirm the house number. wheel. 4. ›Accept destination‹ 2. ›City‹ or ›Spell city‹ 3. Wait for the system to prompt you for the Starting destination guidance town/city. ›Start guidance‹ 4. Say the name of the town/city, or name at least the first three letters. Adding further intermediate 5. Select a location: destinations ▷ Select a recommended town/city: ›Yes‹. ›Add as another destination‹ ▷ Select a different town/city: ›New Further intermediate destinations can be entry‹. added.
▷ Select an entry: ›Entry ...‹, for instance, Storing a destination entry 2. The destination is automatically added to the ▷ Spell an entry: ›Spell city‹. list of last destinations. 6. Continue making the entry as prompted by the system. If there are several towns/cities with the same Planning a trip with in‐ name: termediate destinations Towns/cities of the same name are grouped in a list and displayed as one location followed by New trip an ellipsis. Various intermediate destinations can be en‐ 1. Select an entry: ›Yes‹ or ›Entry ...‹, e. g., En‐ tered for a trip. The trip destination needs to be try 2. entered first, destination entry, refer to 2. Select the desired town/city. page 134. The town/city can also be selected from the list on the onboard monitor:
141 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 142
NAVIGATION Destination entry
Entering intermediate destinations A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can be entered for a trip. 1. "Navigation" 2. Select the type of destination entry and en‐ ter the intermediate destination.
3. "Add as another destination"
4. Select the position where the intermediate destination is to be inserted.
Starting the trip After all intermediate destinations have been entered: "Start guidance"
142 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 143
Destination guidance NAVIGATION
Destination guidance
Vehicle equipment Continuing destination This chapter describes all series equipment as guidance well as country-specific and special equipment If the destination was not reached during the offered for this model series. Therefore, it also last trip, destination guidance can be resumed. describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected "Resume guidance" special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. Route criteria When using the features and systems described here, adhere to local regulations. General information ▷ The route calculated can be influenced by selecting certain criteria. Starting destination ▷ The route criteria can be changed when the guidance destination is entered and during destina‐ tion guidance. 1. "Navigation" ▷ Road types are part of the navigation data 2. Make a destination entry, refer to and are taken into consideration when page 134. planning a route, e.g., avoid highways. 3. "Accept destination" ▷ The recommended route may differ from the route you would take based on per‐ 4. "Start guidance" sonal experience. The route is shown on the Control Display. ▷ The settings are stored for the remote con‐ The distance to the destination/intermediate trol currently in use. destination and the estimated time of arrival ▷ Destination guidance with traffic bulletins, are displayed in the map view. refer to page 149. The arrow view may appear on the Control Dis‐ play. Changing the route criteria 1. "Navigation" Terminating destination 2. "Map" guidance 3. "Route preference" 4. Select the criterion: 1. "Navigation" ▷ "Fast route": time-optimized route, 2. "Map" being a combination of the shortest possible route and the fastest roads. 3. Select the symbol. ▷ "Efficient route": optimized combi‐ 4. "Stop guidance" nation of the fastest and shortest route.
143 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 144
NAVIGATION Destination guidance
▷ "Short route": short distance, irre‐ ▷ Small arrow: indicates the next change in spective of how fast or slow progress direction. will be. ▷ Intersection view. ▷ "Alternative routes": if available, alter‐ ▷ Lane information. native routes are suggested during ac‐ ▷ Traffic bulletins. tive destination guidance. ▷ Distance to the next change in direction. ▷ Street name at the next change in direc‐ tion.
Lane information On multi-lane roads, the recommended lanes are marked in the arrow view by a triangle. ▷ Solid triangle: best lane. ▷ Empty triangle: possible lane. However, an‐ 5. Select additional criteria for the route, if other lane change may be needed shortly. necessary. Where possible, the selected cri‐ teria are avoided on the route. Displaying a list of route sections ▷ "Avoid highways": highways are When destination guidance is active, a list of avoided wherever possible. the route sections can be displayed. The driving ▷ "Avoid toll roads": toll roads are distance and traffic bulletins are displayed for avoided wherever possible. each route section. ▷ "Avoid ferries": ferries are avoided 1. "Navigation" where possible. 2. "Route information"
Route Different views of the route are available during destination guidance: ▷ Arrow view. ▷ List of route sections. ▷ Map view, refer to page 146. 3. Highlight a route section. Arrow view The following information is displayed during destination guidance: Bypassing a section of ▷ Large arrow: indicates the current direction of travel. the route ▷ Street name of the road currently being Calculate a new route for a route section. driven on. 1. "Navigation" 2. "Route information"
144 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 145
Destination guidance NAVIGATION
3. "New route for" 6. Select the symbol. 7. "Start guidance": destination guidance to the selected gas station is started. "Add as another destination": the gas sta‐ tion is added to the route.
Destination guidance through voice instruc‐
4. Turn the MINI joystick. Enter the number of tions kilometers within which you would like to return to the original route. Switching spoken instructions on/off 5. Press the MINI joystick. The spoken instructions can be switched on or off during destination guidance. Resuming the original route The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ If the route section should no longer be by‐ rently in use. passed: 1. "Navigation" 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 2. "Route information" 3. Select the symbol. 3. "New route for:" Symbol Function 4. "Remove blocking" The spoken instructions are switched on.
Gas station recommenda‐ Spoken instructions are switched off. tion The remaining range is calculated and gas sta‐ Repeating a spoken instruction tions along the route are displayed if needed. 1. "Navigation" Even with the latest navigation data, informa‐ 2. "Map" tion on individual Points of Interest may have 3. Highlight the symbol. changed; for example, gas stations might not 4. Press the MINI joystick twice. be in operation.
1. "Navigation" Volume of spoken instructions 2. "Route information" Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐ structions until the desired volume is set. 3. "Recommended refuel" A list of the gas stations is displayed. 4. Highlight a gas station. 5. Select the gas station.
145 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 146
NAVIGATION Destination guidance
tion. Dashed lines represent railways and ferry connections. Country borders are indicated by thin lines.
Traffic obstructions Small triangles along the planned route indicate route sections with traffic obstructions, de‐ pending on the map scale. The direction of the triangles indicates the direction of the obstruc‐ This volume is independent of the volume of tion. the audio sources. The traffic signs indicate the significance of the The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ obstruction. rently in use. ▷ Red traffic sign: the obstruction affects the planned route or direction. ▷ Grey traffic sign: the obstruction does not Map view affect the planned route or direction. Traffic bulletins, refer to page 147. Selecting the map view 1. "Navigation" Planned route 2. "Map" After destination guidance is started, the plan‐ ned route is displayed on the map. At a glance Status fields To show/hide: press the MINI joystick. ▷ Upper status field: time, telephone, and en‐ tertainment details. ▷ Lower status field: symbol for active desti‐ nation guidance, status of traffic bulletins, time of arrival, and distance to destination.
Function bar 1 Function bar The following functions are available in the 2 Route section with traffic obstruction function bar:
3 Traffic sign for traffic obstruction Symbol Function 4 Planned route Start/end destination guidance. 5 Current location Switch spoken instructions on/ 6 Upper status field off. 7 Lower status field Change the route criteria.
Lines in the map Search for a special destina‐ Streets and routes are displayed in different tion. colors and styles depending on their classifica‐
146 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 147
Destination guidance NAVIGATION
Symbol Function "Traffic conditions/gray map" active: the setting is disregarded. Display traffic bulletins. ▷ "Traffic conditions/gray map" Open the interactive map. The map is optimized for displaying Adjust the map views. traffic bulletins. Symbols for the Points of Interest are no Adjust the arrow view. longer displayed. Change the scale. Arrow view Changing the map section When destination guidance is activated, the ar‐ row view can additionally be displayed in the "Interactive map" map view on the right side of the display. ▷ To shift the map: move the MINI joystick in the required direction. 1. "Navigation" ▷ To shift the map diagonally: move the 2. Open "Options". MINI joystick in the required direction and 3. "Arrow display on map" turn the MINI joystick. The arrow view is shown on the map. Changing the scale 1. Select the symbol. 2. To change the scale: turn the MINI joystick.
Automatically scaled map scale In the map view facing north, turn the MINI joy‐ stick in any direction until the AUTO is dis‐ played for the scale. The entire route between the current location and the destination is dis‐ played on the map. Traffic bulletins Settings for the map view The settings are stored for the remote control At a glance currently in use. ▷ Display the traffic bulletins from radio sta‐ 1. "Navigation" tions that broadcast the TI Traffic Informa‐ tion of a traffic information service. Infor‐ 2. "Map" mation on traffic obstructions and hazards 3. Open "Options". is updated continuously. 4. "Settings" ▷ The traffic bulletins are indicated on the 5. To set the map view: map by symbols. ▷ "Day/night mode" The symbol in the function bar of the map Select and create the necessary settings view turns red if there are traffic bulletins that depending on the light conditions. affect the calculated route.
147 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 148
NAVIGATION Destination guidance
Real Time Traffic Information End-User limitation, the implied warranties of merchant‐ Provisions ability, non-infringement fitness for a particular Certain MINI models equipped with navigation purpose, or those arising from a course of deal‐ have the capability to display real-time traffic ing or usage of trade. information. If your system has this capability D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. or the following additional terms and conditions MINI NA will be liable to you for any indirect, apply: special, consequential, exemplary, or incidental An End-User shall no longer have the right to damages (including, without limitation, lost use the Traffic Data in the event that the End- revenues, anticipated revenues, or profits relat‐ User is in material breach of the terms and con‐ ing to the same) arising from any claim relating ditions contained herein. directly or indirectly to use of the traffic data, and even if Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc., or A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear MINI NA are aware of the possibility of such Channel Broadcasting, Inc. ("Total Traffic Net‐ damages. These limitations apply to all claims, work") holds the rights to the traffic incident including, without limitation, claims in contract data and RDS-TMC network through which it is and tort (such as negligence, product liability delivered. You may not modify, copy, scan or and strict liability). Some states do not allow the use any other method to reproduce, duplicate, exclusion or limitation of incidental or conse‐ republish, transmit or distribute in any way any quential damages, so those particular limita‐ portion of traffic incident data. You agree to in‐ tions may not apply to you. demnify, defend and hold harmless MINI of North America, LLC. ("MINI NA") and Total Traf‐ Switching the reception on/off fic Network, Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates) against any and all claims, damages, costs or 1. "Navigation" other expenses that arise directly or indirectly 2. Open "Options". out of (a) your unauthorized use of the traffic 3. "Receive Traffic Info" incident data or the RDS-TMC network, (b) your violation of this directive and/or (c) any unau‐ Open the traffic bulletins thorized or unlawful activities by you in con‐ 1. "Navigation" nection herewith. 2. "Map" B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is informa‐ tional only. User assumes all risk of use. Total 3. "Traffic Info" Traffic Network, MINI NA, and their suppliers First, traffic bulletins for the calculated make no representations about content, traffic route are displayed. and road conditions, route usability, or speed. The traffic bulletins are sorted by their dis‐ C. The licensed material is provided to license tance from the current position of the vehi‐ "as is," and "where is". Total Traffic Network, cle. including, but not limited to, any and all third 4. Select a traffic bulletin. party providers of any of the licensed material, expressly disclaims, to the fullest extent permit‐ "More information": display additional ted by law, all warranties or representations information. with respect to the licensed material (including, 5. Scroll to the next or previous traffic bulletin without limitation, that the licensed material if required. will be error-free, will operate without interrup‐ tion or that the traffic data will be accurate), ex‐ Traffic bulletins on the map press, implied or statutory, including, without "Traffic conditions/gray map" active:
148 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 149
Destination guidance NAVIGATION
The Control Display changes to a black and 4. "Traffic Info categories" white display. This enables a better view of the 5. Select the desired category. traffic bulletins. The day/night mode is disre‐ garded in this setting. Symbols and Points of In‐ terest are not displayed. 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Settings" 5. "Traffic conditions/gray map" Traffic bulletins of the selected category are Symbols in the map view displayed on the map. Depending on the scale of the map and the lo‐ ▷ Traffic bulletins that are relevant to the cation of the traffic obstruction along the route, route are always shown. the symbols for the traffic obstructions are dis‐ played. ▷ For your own safety, traffic bulletins that notify you of potentially dangerous situa‐ Additional information in the map view tions cannot be hidden. Depending on the map scale, a traffic obstruc‐ Destination guidance with traffic tion's length, direction, and impact are dis‐ bulletins played in the map using triangles or gray bars along the calculated route. General information ▷ Red: traffic congestion. Detour suggestions from the navigation system ▷ Orange: stop-and-go traffic. can be manually accepted when using semi-dy‐ ▷ Yellow: heavy traffic. namic destination guidance. When using dy‐ ▷ Green: clear roads. namic destination guidance, they are automati‐ cally accepted for route guidance. ▷ Gray: general traffic bulletins such as road construction. Semi-dynamic destination guidance The displayed information depends on the par‐ When traffic bulletin reception is switched on, ticular traffic information service. semi-dynamic destination guidance is active. Filtering traffic bulletins The destination guidance system takes the available traffic bulletins into account. A mes‐ You can set which traffic bulletins appear on sage is displayed depending on the route, the the map. traffic bulletins, and the possible detour routes. 1. "Navigation" If possible, a detour is offered in case of traffic obstructions. In addition, distance and time dif‐ 2. "Map" ferences between the original route and the 3. Open "Options". detour are displayed.
Accepting the detour "Detour"
149 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 150
NAVIGATION Destination guidance
In the event of special hazards, e. g., objects on the road, a message is displayed without a de‐ tour suggestion. Detours can also be accepted if the traffic mes‐ sages are called up in the list. 1. "Navigation" 2. "Map" 3. "Traffic Info" 4. "Detour information" 5. "Detour"
Dynamic destination guidance The route is automatically changed in the event of traffic obstructions. ▷ The system does not point out traffic ob‐ structions along the original route. ▷ Traffic bulletins continue to be displayed on the map. ▷ Depending on road type and the kind and extent of the traffic obstruction, the calcu‐ lated route may lead through the traffic ob‐ struction. ▷ Dangerous situations are displayed regard‐ less of the setting.
Activating dynamic destination guidance 1. "Navigation" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Dynamic guidance"
150 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 151
What to do if... NAVIGATION
What to do if...
What to do if... If the battery was disconnected, it takes up to 10 minutes for the system to becoming ▷ The current transmission position cannot be functional again. displayed? The vehicle is located in an unrecognized region, is in a poor reception area, or the system is currently determining the posi‐ tion. Reception is usually best when you have an unobstructed view of the sky. ▷ The destination without street information is not used for route guidance? When city has been input, no downtown can be determined. Input any street in the selected city and start destination guid‐ ance. ▷ The destination is not used for route guid‐ ance? The destination data are not contained in the navigation data. Select a destination that is as close as possible to the original. ▷ Letters for destination input cannot be se‐ lected? The stored data do not contain the data of the destination. Select a goal that is as close as possible to the original. ▷ Is the map displayed in shades of gray? "Traffic conditions/gray map" active: The Control Display changes to a black and white display. This enables a better view of the traffic bulletins. ▷ Spoken instructions are no longer output during route guidance in front of intersec‐ tions? The area has not yet been fully recorded, or you have left the recommended route and the system requires a few seconds to calcu‐ late a new route suggestion. ▷ Does the navigation system fail to react to entries?
151 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15
ROCK ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATION
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 154
ENTERTAINMENT Tone
Tone
Vehicle equipment 3. Select the desired tone settings. This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series. Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using the features and systems described 4. To set: turn the MINI joystick. here, adhere to local regulations. 5. To save: press the MINI joystick.
General information Volume The sound settings are stored for the remote control currently in use. ▷ "Speed volume": speed-dependent volume control. ▷ "PDC": volume of the PDC signal compared Treble, bass, balance, to the entertainment sound output. and fader ▷ "Gong": volume of the signal, such as the safety belt reminder, compared to the en‐ ▷ "Treble": treble adjustment. tertainment sound output. ▷ "Bass": depth adjustment. Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package ▷ "Balance": left/right volume distribution. ▷ "Microphone": volume of the microphone ▷ "Fader": front/rear volume distribution. during a phone call. ▷ "Loudspeak.": volume of the loudspeakers Setting treble, bass, balance, and fader during a phone call. 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" The following volumes are only stored for the 2. "Tone" respective paired telephone: "Microphone", "Loudspeak.".
Adjusting the volume 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone" 3. "Volume settings"
154 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 155
Tone ENTERTAINMENT
4. Select the desired volume setting.
5. To set: turn the MINI joystick. 6. To save: press the MINI joystick.
Resetting the tone set‐ tings All tone settings can be reset to the default set‐ ting. 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings" 2. "Tone" 3. "Reset"
155 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 156
ENTERTAINMENT Radio
Radio
Vehicle equipment Sound output This chapter describes all series equipment as Switching on/off well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series. Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using the features and systems described here, adhere to local regulations.
When the ignition is switched off: press ON/OFF Controls button on the radio.
Muting When the ignition is switched on or the engine is running: press the ON/OFF button on the radio. This symbol at the upper edge of the Con‐ trol Display indicates that the sound is switched off.
1 CD drive 2 Changing the waveband AM/FM station 3 Changing the audio source Selecting a station 4 Volume, on/off 5 Change station/track On the onboard monitor: 6 Ejecting the CD 1. "Radio" 2. "FM" or "AM"
156 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 157
Radio ENTERTAINMENT
3. Select the desired station. Press and hold the MINI joystick to store a sta‐ tion that is displayed in the station list but is not being played. The stations are stored for the remote control currently in use.
Selecting a station manually Station selection via the frequency. 1. "Radio" 2. "FM" or "AM" Selecting the waveband using the 3. "Manual" button on the radio 4. To select a frequency: turn the MINI joy‐ stick. Press the button repeatedly until the To save a station: press and hold the desired waveband is displayed. MINI joystick. Changing the station Turn and press the MINI joystick or
Press the button or Press the buttons on the steering wheel. All saved stations are stored for the remote control currently in use. RDS Storing a station RDS broadcasts additional information, such as 1. "Radio" the station name, in the FM wave band. 2. "FM" or "AM" Switching the RDS on/off 3. Highlight the desired station. 1. "Radio" 2. "FM"
4. Press the MINI joystick. 5. Select the desired memory location.
157 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 158
ENTERTAINMENT Radio
3. Open "Options". between analog and digital reception. In this 4. "RDS" case, switch off digital radio reception. Note on HD multicast stations whose station name ends in ...HD2, ...HD3, ...: In areas in which the station is not continuously received in digital mode, the audible signal may be interrupted for several seconds. This is reception related.
Displaying additional information Some stations broadcast additional information The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ on the current track, such as the name of the rently in use. artist. 1. Select the desired station. HD Radio™ reception 2. Open "Options". Many stations broadcast both analog and digi‐ 3. "Station info" tal signals. License conditions Selecting a substation HD Radio Technology manufactured under li‐ This symbol indicates that a main station cense from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. also broadcasts additional substations. The sta‐ and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, tion name of the main station ends in HD1. Sta‐ HD Radio, and Arc logos are proprietary trade‐ tion names of the substations end in HD2, HD3, marks of iBiquity Digital Corp. etc.
Activating/deactivating digital radio 1. Select the desired station. reception 2. Press the controller. 1. "Radio" 3. Select the substation. 2. "FM" or "AM" When reception is poor, the substation is 3. Open "Options". muted. 4. "HD Radio Reception" The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ Satellite radio rently in use. This symbol is displayed in the status line General information when the audio signal is digital. The channels are offered in predefined pack‐ When tuning to a station with a digital signal, it ages. The packages must be enabled by tele‐ may take several seconds for the station to be phone. played back in digital quality. Note on HD stations whose station name ends in ...HD or HD1: In areas in which the station is not continuously received in digital mode, the playback switches
158 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 159
Radio ENTERTAINMENT
Navigation bar overview The phone number and an electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed. Symbol Function 6. Select the phone number to have the chan‐ Change the list view. nel enabled.
Select the category.
Direct channel entry
Timeshift
Open the My Favorites category/ open a favorite.
Manage the favorites.
Traffic Jump You can unsubscribe from the channels again via this phone number. Managing a subscription To be able to enable or unsubscribe from the Unsubscribing from channels channels, you must have reception. It is usually 1. "Radio" at its best when you have an unobstructed view 2. "Satellite radio" of the sky. The channel name is displayed in the 3. Open "Options". status line. 4. "Manage subscription" Enabling channels The Unsubscribed Channels category contains all disabled channels.
1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Category"
5. The phone number and an electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed. 6. Call Sirius to unsubscribe from the channels.
Selecting channels You can only listen to enabled channels. The selected channel is stored for the remote 4. Select the Unsubscribed Channels category. control currently in use. 5. Select the desired channel.
159 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 160
ENTERTAINMENT Radio
Via the onboard monitor 6. Press the MINI joystick again to confirm the 1. "Radio" highlighted channel. 2. "Satellite radio" 3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate‐ gory. 4. Select the desired channel.
7. Select the desired memory location. The channels are stored for the remote control currently in use.
Changing the list view Via the buttons in the area of the CD The list view changes every time the first sym‐ player bol on the navigation bar is pressed. Information on the channel is displayed.
Press the button. Symbol Meaning The next channel is selected. Channel name
Via direct channel entry Artist
1. "Radio" Track 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Set channel" Selecting a category 4. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired 1. "Radio" channel is reached and press the MINI joy‐ 2. "Satellite radio" stick. 3. "Category" Storing a channel 4. Select the desired category. 1. "Radio" Timeshift 2. "Satellite radio" Approx. one hour of the program being broad‐ 3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de‐ cast on the channel currently being listened to sired category. is stored in a buffer. Prerequisite: the signal 4. Select the desired channel. must be available. 5. Press the MINI joystick again. The stored audio track can be played with a de‐ lay following the live broadcast. When the buf‐ fer is full, the older tracks are overwritten. The buffer is cleared when a new channel is se‐ lected.
160 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 161
Radio ENTERTAINMENT
Opening the timeshift function The audio playback then continues with a time 1. "Radio" delay. 2. "Satellite radio" Activating 3. "Replay - Time shift" 1. "Radio" 2. "Satellite radio" 3. "Replay - Time shift" 4. "Automatic time shift"
Deactivating "Automatic time shift"
Storing favorites ▷ The red arrow shows the current playback Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favorites position. list. Available favorites are artist, track, game, ▷ The time difference to the live broadcast is league, and team. displayed next to the buffer bar. Storing the artist, track, or game ▷ For live transmissions "live". It is only possible to store favorites that are cur‐ Timeshift menu rently being broadcast. The channel informa‐ tion must be available. Symbol Function 1. "Radio" Go to the live broadcast 2. "Satellite radio" Playback/pause 3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de‐ sired category. Next track 4. Select the desired channel. Previous track 5. Press the MINI joystick again. Fast forward 6. Select the artist, track, or game.
Reverse Storing the league or team Automatic timeshift deactivated/ Leagues or teams can be added to the favorites activated from a selection list.
1. "Radio" Automatic timeshift 2. "Satellite radio" When the function is activated, audio playback 3. "Manage favorites" is stopped automatically in the event of: ▷ Incoming and outgoing telephone calls. ▷ Activation of the voice activation system. ▷ Muting.
161 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 162
ENTERTAINMENT Radio
4. "Add sports information" 3. Select "Activate alert" or the desired favor‐ ites. The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use.
Deleting favorites 1. "Satellite radio" 2. "Manage favorites" 3. Highlight the desired favorite. 4. Open "Options". 5. Select the league. 5. "Delete entry" 6. Select "Add all teams" or the desired team. Traffic Jump Opening the favorites Traffic and weather information for a selected If an activated favorite is played back, the fol‐ region is broadcast every few minutes. lowing message appears for approx. 20 sec‐ onds "Favorite alert!". Selecting a region "Favorites" 1. "Radio" Select the symbol while the message is shown. 2. "Satellite radio" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Set jump" 5. Select the desired region. The region is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use.
Activating/deactivating the jump 1. "Radio" The displayed favorite is played. 2. "Satellite radio" If there is no message, the system changes to 3. "Jump to:" the My Favorites category. All favorites cur‐ Information for the selected region is broadcast rently being broadcast can be selected from a as soon as it is available. list. A new panel opens. Managing the favorites Canceling the Traffic Jump: "Cancel".
Symbol Meaning Activating/deactivating the favorites Favorites can be activated and deactivated Information will be broadcast shortly. globally and individually. Information is currently being broad‐ 1. "Satellite radio" cast. 2. "Manage favorites"
162 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 163
Radio ENTERTAINMENT
Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic 3. "Store station" Jump.
Automatic update About twice a year, Sirius performs an update of the channel names and positions. The up‐ date takes place automatically and may take several minutes.
Notes ▷ Reception may not be available in some sit‐ 4. Select the desired memory location. uations, such as under certain environmen‐ The list of stored stations is stored for the re‐ tal or topographic conditions. The satellite mote control currently in use. radio has no influence on this. ▷ The signal may not be available in tunnels Deleting a station or underground garages; next to tall build‐ 1. "Radio" ings; or near trees, mountains or other powerful sources of radio interference. 2. "Presets" 3. Select the desired station. 4. Open "Options". Stored stations 5. "Delete entry" General information It is possible to store up to 40 stations.
Calling up a station 1. "Radio" 2. "Presets" 3. Select the desired station.
Storing a station The station currently selected is stored.
1. "Radio" 2. "Presets"
163 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 164
ENTERTAINMENT CD/multimedia
CD/multimedia
Vehicle equipment CD player This chapter describes all series equipment as Playback well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series. Therefore, it also Inserting the CD describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected Insert the CD with the printed side facing up. special equipment or the country version. This Playback begins automatically. also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ Reading can take a few minutes with com‐ tems. pressed audio files. When using the features and systems described here, adhere to local regulations. Starting playback A CD is contained in the CD player. Sound output 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD" Switching on/off 3. Select the desired track. Press the MINI joy‐ stick to start playback.
When the ignition is switched off: press ON/OFF button on the radio. Playable formats Muting ▷ CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA. ▷ Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC. When the ignition is switched on or the engine is running: press the ON/OFF button on the radio. Ejecting the CD
This symbol at the upper edge of the Con‐ Press the button on the CD player. trol Display indicates that the sound is switched off. The CD emerges slightly from the drive.
164 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 165
CD/multimedia ENTERTAINMENT
Audio playback 2. Select the desired track to begin playback.
Selecting the track using the button
Press the button for the appropri‐ ate direction as often as necessary until the de‐ sired track is played back.
Selecting the track on the onboard monitor
Audio CDs Displaying information on the track
Select the desired track to begin playback. If information about a track has been stored, it is displayed automatically: CDs with compressed audio files ▷ Artist. Depending on the data, some letters and num‐ bers of the CD may not be displayed correctly. ▷ Album track. ▷ Number of tracks on the CD. 1. Select the directory if necessary. ▷ File name of track. To change to a higher level directory: move the MINI joystick to the left. Random playback 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD" 3. Select the desired CD.
165 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 166
ENTERTAINMENT CD/multimedia
4. Open "Options". ▷ Only use round CDs with a standard diame‐ 5. "Random" ter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs with an adapter, e.g., single CDs; otherwise, the CDs or the adapter may jam and no lon‐ ger eject.◀
General malfunctions ▷ The CD players have been optimized for performance in vehicles. In some instances they may be more sensitive to faulty CDs than stationary devices would be. ▷ If a CD cannot be played, first check if it has To switch off random playback: press the been inserted correctly. MINI joystick. Humidity Fast forward/reverse High levels of humidity can lead to condensa‐ Press and hold the button for the tion on the CD or the laser's scan lens, and tem‐ corresponding direction. porarily prevent playback.
Automatic repeat Malfunctions with particular CDs The selected track, directories, or CDs are re‐ If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs, peated automatically. this can be due to one of the following causes:
Notes Self-recorded CDs ▷ Possible reasons for malfunctions with self- CD player recorded CDs are inconsistent data creation or recording processes, or poor quality or Do not remove the cover old age of the blank CD. The CD players are officially designated ▷ Only label CDs on the upper side with a pen Class 1 laser products. Do not operate if the intended for this purpose. cover is damaged; otherwise, severe eye dam‐ age can result.◀ Damage ▷ Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and CDs moisture. Using CDs ▷ Store CDs in a sleeve. ▷ Do not use self-recorded CDs with la‐ ▷ Do not subject CDs to temperatures over bels applied, as these can become 50 ℃/122 ℉, high humidity, or direct sun‐ detached during playback due to light. heat buildup and can cause irrepara‐ ble damage to the device. CDs with copy protection CDs are often provided with a copy protection feature by the manufacturer. This can mean
166 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 167
CD/multimedia ENTERTAINMENT
that some CDs cannot be played or can only be Connecting played to a limited extent. The AUX-IN port is in the center console. MACROVISION Connect the headphone connec‐ This product contains copyrighted technology tor or line-out connector of the that is based on multiple registered US patents device to the AUX-IN port. and the intellectual property of the Macrovision Corporation and other manufacturers. The use Ensure that the connector is inserted all the of this copy protection must be approved by way into the AUX-IN port. Macrovision. Media protected by this product - unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision - Playback may only be used for private purposes. Copying 1. Connect the audio device, switch it on and of this technology is prohibited. select a track on the audio device. 2. "CD/Multimedia" External devices 3. If necessary, "External devices"
At a glance Various external devices can be connected with the vehicle. Depending on how the device is connected to the vehicle, it may be possible to operate it using the MINI joystick.
Symbol Meaning AUX-IN port
USB audio interface 4. "AUX front" Sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers. Music interface for smartphones
Bluetooth audio Volume The volume of the sound output is dependent AUX-IN port on the audio device. If this volume differs markedly from the volume of the other audio At a glance sources, it is advisable to adjust the volumes. ▷ For connecting audio devices, e.g., MP3 Adjusting the volume player. The sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers. 1. "CD/Multimedia" ▷ Recommendation: use medium tone and 2. If necessary, "External devices" volume settings on the audio device. The 3. "AUX front" tone depends on the quality of the audio files.
167 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 168
ENTERTAINMENT CD/multimedia
4. "Volume" ▷ WMA. ▷ WAV (PCM). ▷ AAC, M4A. ▷ Without the voice activation system: play‐ back lists: M3U ▷ With the voice activation system: playback lists: M3U, WPL, PLS
Video files Standard video files can be played back with a 5. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired vol‐ compatible Apple device: ume is set and press the MINI joystick. ▷ MPEG4 USB audio interface/music interface for ▷ H.264 smartphones File system At a glance Standard file systems for USB devices are sup‐ It is possible to connect external audio devices. ported. The FAT 32 format is recommended. They are operated via the onboard monitor. The sound is output on the vehicle loudspeak‐ Connecting ers. The USB audio interface is in the center console. Connectors for external devices ▷ Connection via USB audio interface: Apple iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g., MP3 play‐ ers, USB flash drives, or mobile phones that are supported by the USB audio interface. Connection of Apple iPod/iPhone via USB ▷ Connection via snap-in adapter, when audio interface equipped with the music interface for To connect the iPod, use the special cable smartphones: Apple iPhone or mobile adapter for the Apple iPod. Additional informa‐ phones. tion can be obtained from the service center or Playback is only possible if no audio device on the Internet: www.mini.com/connectivity. is connected to the analog AUX-IN port. Connect the Apple iPod/iPhone with the AUX- Due to the large number of different audio de‐ IN port and USB interface. vices available on the market, it cannot be en‐ The Apple iPod/iPhone menu structure is sup‐ sured that every audio device/mobile phone is ported by the USB audio interface. operable on the vehicle. Ask your service center about suitable audio Connection of a USB device via the USB devices/mobile phones. audio interface Connect using a flexible adapter cable to pro‐ Audio files tect the USB audio interface and the USB device Standard audio files can be played back: against physical damage. ▷ MP3. Connect the USB device to the USB interface.
168 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 169
CD/multimedia ENTERTAINMENT
After connecting for the first time 3. Select the or symbol. Information on all music tracks, e.g. artist or type of music, as well as playback lists are transmitted into the vehicle. This may take some time, depending on the USB device and the number of tracks. During transmission, the tracks can be called up via the file directory.
Number of tracks Information from up to four USB devices or for 4. "Search" approx. 26,000 tracks can be stored in the ve‐ 5. Select the desired category, e.g., "Genre" or hicle. If a fifth device is connected or if more "Artist". than 26,000 tracks are stored, information on All entries are displayed in a list. existing tracks may be deleted. ▷ Open "A-Z search" and input the de‐ Copy protection sired entry. Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Man‐ When a letter is entered, the results are agement (DRM) cannot be played. filtered using this letter as the first let‐ ter. If multiple letters are entered, all re‐ Audio playback sults that contain that sequence are dis‐ played. 1. "CD/Multimedia" ▷ Select the desired entry from the list. 2. "External devices" 3. Select the or symbol. The playback starts with the first track. The CD cover belonging to the track may ap‐ pear on the Control Display after several sec‐ onds.
Track search Selection is possible via: ▷ Playback lists. 6. Select other categories if you wish. ▷ Information: type of music, artist, and, if Not all categories need to be selected. For available, composer, album, track. example, if all of the tracks by a certain ar‐ ▷ Additionally for USB devices: file directory, tist are to be displayed, call up that artist composer. only. All of the tracks by that artist are then displayed. Tracks are displayed if they have been saved in the Latin alphabet. 7. "Play"
Starting the track search Restarting a track search 1. "CD/Multimedia" "New search" 2. "External devices"
169 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 170
ENTERTAINMENT CD/multimedia
Playback lists countries, the parking brake must be set or P Calling up playback lists. must be engaged. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the or symbol. 3. Select the or symbol. 4. "Playlists" 4. "Video"
Current playback List of tracks currently being played. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the or symbol. 4. "Current playback"
Random playback 5. Select the desired file. The current list of tracks is played back in ran‐ Select the category in the file directory. dom order. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Random"
Fast forward/reverse Buttons on the steering wheel or on the CD player: 6. Press the MINI joystick. Playback of the selected video file starts. Press and hold the button for the corresponding direction. Notes Video playback Do not expose the audio device to extreme en‐ vironmental conditions, such as very high tem‐ At a glance peratures; refer to the audio device operating instructions. Video playback is only possible with a compati‐ ble iPod/iPhone. Connect using a video-capable Depending on the configuration of the audio adapter cable or, if applicable, a snap-in files, e.g., bit rates greater than 256 kbit/s, the adapter. files may not play back correctly in each case. Audio and video playback from the snap-in Playback adapter is only possible if no cable is connected The video image on the Control Display is dis‐ to the AV-IN port. played while the vehicle is stationary; in some
170 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 171
CD/multimedia ENTERTAINMENT
Information on connection confirmation or visibility; refer to the device ▷ The connected audio device is supplied operating instructions. with a max. power of 500 mA if supported ▷ A number with at least four and a maxi‐ by the device. Therefore, do not addition‐ mum of 16 digits is defined as the Blue‐ ally connect the device to a socket in the tooth passkey. It is only required once for vehicle; otherwise, playback may be com‐ pairing. promised. ▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐ Pairing and connecting nector into the USB interface. Pairing a device ▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or To avoid becoming distracted and posing lamps to the USB audio interface. an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi‐ ▷ Do not connect USB hard drives. cle's occupants and to other road users, only ▷ Do not use the USB audio interface to re‐ pair the device while the vehicle is stationary.◀ charge external devices. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth® (audio)" Bluetooth audio 3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio" At a glance 4. "Add new phone" ▷ Music files on external devices such as au‐ The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐ dio devices or mobile phones can be played played. back via Bluetooth. Use of a mobile phone as an audio source, refer to page 190. ▷ Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. ▷ The sound is output on the vehicle loud‐ speakers. ▷ The volume of the sound output is depend‐ ent on the device. If necessary, adjust the volume on the device. 5. Perform additional steps on the device, re‐ fer to the device operating instructions: for ▷ Up to four external devices can be paired instance, search for or connect the Blue‐ with the vehicle. tooth device or a new device. Requirements The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the device display. ▷ The device is suitable. Information under www.mini.com/connectivity. 6. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the device display. ▷ The device is ready for operation. You are prompted by the onboard monitor ▷ The ignition is switched on. or device to enter the same Bluetooth pass‐ ▷ Bluetooth is activated on the vehicle, refer key. to page 189, and on the device. 7. Enter the passkey and confirm. ▷ Bluetooth presettings must be made on the or device, such as for a connection without
171 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 172
ENTERTAINMENT CD/multimedia
Compare the control number on the vehicle 4. Select the desired device from the list of display with the control number on the mo‐ paired devices. bile phone display. Confirm the control 5. Open "Options". number on the mobile phone and in the 6. "Configure phone" vehicle. 7. Activate "Audio". "OK" 8. "OK"
Connecting the device 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth® (audio)" 3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio" 4. Select the desired device from the list of paired devices.
8. Select the desired functions with which the device is to be connected, for instance "Audio". 9. "OK" If pairing was successful, the device is displayed as connected. White symbol : the device is active as an au‐ dio source. If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., re‐ White symbol : the device is active as an au‐ fer to page 173. dio source.
Connecting a specific device Playback A device that has already been paired can be General information connected as an active audio source. ▷ The display of music track information de‐ Connecting is not possible when data is ex‐ pends on the device. changed via a mobile phone connected via Bluetooth. ▷ Operation can takes place on the device or onboard monitor. Requirements ▷ Playback is interrupted when data is ex‐ If necessary, activate the audio connection of changed via a mobile phone connected via the desired device from the list of paired devi‐ Bluetooth. ces. Starting playback 1. "CD/Multimedia" 1. Connect the device. 2. "Bluetooth® (audio)" 2. "CD/Multimedia" 3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio" 3. "External devices"
172 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 173
CD/multimedia ENTERTAINMENT
4. Select the symbol. 4. Open "Options". 5. Open "Select player". 6. Select the desired channel.
Disconnecting the audio connection 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "Bluetooth® (audio)" 3. Highlight the desired device. 4. Open "Options". 5. Select the desired track from the list, if nec‐ 5. "Configure phone" essary. 6. "Audio"
Playback menu 7. "OK" Depending on the particular device, some of In the case of a mobile phone, only the audio the functions may not be available. connection is disconnected. All other connec‐ tions are retained. Symbol Function Next track Unpairing a device Fast forward: press and hold the sym‐ 1. "CD/Multimedia" bol. 2. "Bluetooth® (audio)" Previous music track 3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio" Reverse: press and hold the symbol. 4. Highlight the device that is to be unpaired. 5. Open "Options". Track search 6. "Remove phone from list" Music track search is possible depending on the device. 1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "External devices" 3. Select the symbol. 4. "Search device content" 5. "A-Z search" 6. Select the desired entry or directory. What to do if... Playback mode Information on suitable devices can be found at Depending on the device, different programs www.mini.com/connectivity. for playing back music files might be available. Suitable mobile phones, refer to page 188. 1. "CD/Multimedia" The device is not supported by the vehicle. 2. "External devices" ▷ Perform a software update, refer to 3. Select the symbol. page 174, if needed.
173 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 174
ENTERTAINMENT CD/multimedia
The device could not be paired or connected. Playback is interrupted by a telephone call or ▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the device traffic bulletin and is not resumed automati‐ and the vehicle match? Enter the same cally. passkey on the device and via the onboard ▷ Switch the radio on and off again. monitor. Playback is not possible if the mobile phone is ▷ A multi-character passkey may be needed. connected via Bluetooth Audio while it is also ▷ Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter connected via the music interface for smart‐ the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure. phones in the snap-in adapter. ▷ Are too many Bluetooth devices connected ▷ Disconnect one of the two connections; for to the device or vehicle? Delete connec‐ example, disconnect the audio connection, tions with other devices if necessary. refer to page 173, and restart playback. ▷ Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or If all points in this list have been checked and does it have only a limited remaining bat‐ the required function is still not available, tery life? Charge the mobile phone in the please contact the hotline or service center. snap-in adapter or via a charging cable. Software Update ▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi‐ ble that only one device can be connected The vehicle supports various external devices to the vehicle. Unpair the connected device depending on the current software version. from the vehicle and pair and connect only With a software update, the vehicle can support one device. new mobile phones or new external device, for example. ▷ The device no longer reacts? Switch the de‐ vice off and on again. Software updates and related current informa‐ tion is available at www.mini.com/connectivity. ▷ Repeat the pairing procedure. Music cannot be played back. Displaying the current version ▷ Start the program for playing back music The currently installed software is displayed. data on the device and select a track on the device if necessary. 1. "Settings" ▷ Switch the radio on and off again. 2. "Software update" Music files can only be played back softly. 3. "Show current version" ▷ Adjust the volume settings on the device. Updating the software Videos can only be played back without audio The software may only be updated when the or with delayed audio. vehicle is stationary. ▷ Check the compatibility of the devices. In‐ formation under www.mini.com/connectiv‐ 1. Store the file for the software-update in the ity. main director of a USB flash drive. Playback is disturbed when buttons are pressed 2. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB au‐ or by other messages on the device. dio interface in the center console. An up‐ date via the USB interface in the glove com‐ ▷ Switch off the button tones and other signal partment is not possible. tones on the device. 3. "Settings" 4. "Software update"
174 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 175
CD/multimedia ENTERTAINMENT
5. "Update software"
6. "Start update" 7. "OK" All listed software updates are installed.
Restoring the previous version The software version prior to the last software update can be restored. The previous version can only be restored when the vehicle is stationary. 1. "Settings" 2. "Software update" 3. "Restore previous version" 4. "OK" Double-click. All listed software updates are removed.
Note While the software is being updated or a previ‐ ous version is being restored, MINI Connected, Office functions, and the connected devices are temporarily unavailable. Wait several minutes for the functions to become available again.
175 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15
CONNECT ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATION
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 178
COMMUNICATION Bluetooth hands-free system
Bluetooth hands-free system
Vehicle equipment Approved mobile phones Details on which mobile phones are supported This chapter describes all series equipment as by the hands-free system can be obtained at well as country-specific and special equipment www.mini.com/connectivity. offered for this model series. Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in Displaying the vehicle identification your vehicle, for instance due to the selected number and software part number special equipment or the country version. This The vehicle identification number and software also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ part number are needed to determine which tems. mobile phones are supported by the mobile When using the features and systems described phone preparation package. The software ver‐ here, adhere to local regulations. sion of the mobile phone may also be required. 1. "Telephone" At a glance 2. Open "Options". 3. "Bluetooth® info" The concept 4. "Display system information" Mobile phones can be connected with the vehi‐ These approved mobile phones with a certain cle via Bluetooth. software version, support the vehicle functions Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue‐ described below. tooth® SIG, Inc. Malfunctions may occur with other mobile After these devices are paired once, they are phones or software versions. recognized automatically when the ignition is Do not operate a mobile phone that is con‐ switched on as soon as they are in the vehicle nected to the vehicle on the mobile phone key‐ and can then be operated via the onboard pad, as this may lead to a malfunction. monitor, using the buttons on the steering wheel, and via voice activation. Notes Up to four external devices can be paired. At high temperatures, the charging function of Certain functions may need to be enabled by the mobile phone may be limited and functions the mobile phone provider or service provider. may not be executed. Using the mobile phone while driving When using the mobile phone via the vehicle, Make entries only when traffic and road note the operating instructions of the mobile conditions allow. Do not hold the mobile phone phone. in your hand while you are driving; use the hands-free system instead. If you do not ob‐ serve this precaution, you can endanger the ve‐ hicle occupants and other road users.◀
178 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 179
Bluetooth hands-free system COMMUNICATION
Pairing/unpairing the Pairing and connecting a mobile phone mobile phone Pairing the mobile phone To avoid becoming distracted and posing Requirements an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi‐ ▷ The mobile phone is suitable, refer to cle's occupants and to other road users, only page 178. pair the mobile phone while the vehicle is sta‐ tionary.◀ ▷ The mobile phone is ready for operation. ▷ Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle and on 1. "Telephone" the mobile phone. 2. "Bluetooth® (phone)" ▷ Bluetooth presettings may need to be 3. "Add new phone" made on the mobile phone, e.g., for a con‐ The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐ nection without confirmation or visibility, played. refer to the mobile phone operating in‐ structions. ▷ Deactivate Bluetooth audio if necessary. ▷ A number with at least four and a maxi‐ mum of 16 digits was defined as the Blue‐ tooth passkey. It is only required once for pairing. ▷ Compare the control number on the Control Display with the control number on the mo‐ bile phone display. Confirm the control 4. To perform additional steps on the mobile number on the mobile phone and in the phone, refer to the mobile phone operating vehicle. instructions: for instance, search for or con‐ ▷ The radio ready state is switched on. nect the Bluetooth device or a new device. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears Activating/deactivating Bluetooth on the mobile phone display. Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply 5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on with all safety guidelines and regulations. the mobile phone display. 1. "Telephone" 6. You are prompted by the onboard monitor 2. Open "Options". or mobile phone to enter the same Blue‐ tooth passkey. Enter the passkey and con‐ 3. "Bluetooth®" firm. or Compare the control number on the vehicle display with the control number on the mo‐ bile phone display. Confirm the control number on the mobile phone and in the vehicle.
179 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 180
COMMUNICATION Bluetooth hands-free system
"OK" 3. Select the mobile phone that is to be con‐ nected.
7. Select the functions for which the mobile phone is to be used. Unpairing the mobile phone 8. "OK" 1. "Telephone" 9. Move the MINI joystick to the left. 2. "Bluetooth® (phone)" If the pairing was successful, the mobile phone appears at the top of the list of mobile phones. All paired mobile phones are listed. If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., re‐ 3. Highlight the mobile phone that is to be fer to page 180. unpaired. 4. Open "Options". Following the initial pairing 5. "Remove phone from list" ▷ The mobile phone is detected/connected in the vehicle within a short period of time when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on. ▷ The phone book entries of the telephone stored on the SIM card or mobile phone are transmitted to the vehicle after detection, depending on the mobile phone. ▷ Four mobile phones can be paired. ▷ Specific settings may be necessary in some mobile phones, e.g., authorization or a se‐ What to do if... cure connection; refer to the mobile phone Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to operating instructions. page 178. The mobile phone could not be paired or con‐ Connecting a particular mobile phone nected. 1. "Telephone" ▷ Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and on 2. "Bluetooth® (phone)" the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in All paired mobile phones are listed. the vehicle and on the mobile phone. ▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile phone and the vehicle match? Enter the same passkey on the mobile phone and via the onboard monitor.
180 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 181
Bluetooth hands-free system COMMUNICATION
▷ A multi-character passkey may be needed. If all points in this list have been checked and ▷ Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter the required function is still not available, con‐ the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure. tact Customer Relations or the service center. ▷ Are too many Bluetooth devices connected to the mobile phone or vehicle? Delete con‐ nections with other devices if necessary. Controls ▷ The mobile phone is in power-save mode Adjusting the volume or has only a limited remaining battery life. Charge the mobile phone via the charging cable. ▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi‐ ble that only one mobile phone can be con‐ nected to the vehicle. Unpair the connected mobile phone from the vehicle and pair and connect only one mobile phone. The mobile phone no longer reacts. ▷ Switch the mobile phone off and on again. Turn the knob until the desired volume is se‐ ▷ Is the ambient temperature too high or lected. The setting is stored for the remote con‐ low? Do not expose the mobile phone to trol currently in use. extreme environmental conditions.
No phone book entries or only some phone Incoming call book entries are displayed, or they are incom‐ plete. Receiving calls ▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is If the number of the caller is stored in the not yet complete. phone book and is transmitted by the network, ▷ It is possible that only the phone book en‐ the name of the contact is displayed. Other‐ tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card wise, only the phone number is displayed. are transmitted. If more than one phone number is assigned to ▷ It may not be possible to display phone a contact, only the name of the contact is dis‐ book entries with special characters. played. ▷ The number of phone book entries to be stored is too high. Accepting a call ▷ Is the data volume of the contact too large, Press the button on the steering e. g., due to stored information such as wheel. notes? Reduce the data volume of the con‐ tact. or The phone connection quality is poor. "Accept" ▷ The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the mobile phone can be adjusted, depending on the mobile phone. ▷ Place the mobile phone in the area of the center console.
181 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 182
COMMUNICATION Bluetooth hands-free system
3. Select the digits individually. 4. Select the symbol.
Rejecting a call "Reject" The phone number can also be entered by Ending a call voice.
Press the button on the steering Calls with multiple parties wheel.
or General information You can switch between calls or connect two 1. "Telephone" calls to a single conference call. These functions 2. "End call" must be supported by the mobile phone and service provider.
Accepting a call while speaking to another party This function might have to be activated by the service provider and the mobile phone must be adjusted accordingly. If a second call comes in during an ongoing call, a call waiting signal is sounded. "Accept" Entering a phone number The call is accepted and the existing call is put Dialing a number on hold. 1. "Telephone" Establishing a second call 2. "Dial number" Establish an additional call during an active call. 1. "Telephone" 2. "Active calls" 3. "Hold"
182 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 183
Bluetooth hands-free system COMMUNICATION
The existing call is put on hold. ces, e.g., to make a remote inquiry of an an‐ swering machine. The DTMF code is needed for this purpose. 1. "Telephone" 2. Select the contact from a list or "Dial number". 3. "Keypad dialing"
4. Dial the new phone number or select it from a list. "Return" The call on hold is resumed.
Switching between two calls, hold call Active call: highlighted. 4. Enter the DTMF code on the onboard moni‐ Call on hold identified by: "on hold...". tor. Select the symbol to change to the call on DTMF suffix dialing is not possible during con‐ hold. ference calls.
Establishing a conference call Phone book Two calls can be connected to a single tele‐ phone conference call. Displays The phone book accesses the contacts and 1. Establish two calls. shows all contacts for which a phone number 2. "Conference call" has been stored. The entries can be selected to make a call. 1. "Telephone" 2. "Phone book" A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts.
When terminating a conference call, both calls are ended. If one call is terminated by another party, the other call can be continued.
DTMF suffix dialing DTMF suffix dialing can be used for gaining ac‐ cess to network services or for controlling devi‐
183 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 184
COMMUNICATION Bluetooth hands-free system
Calling a contact Dialing a number on the onboard monitor Symbol Meaning 1. "Telephone" Contact with one stored phone num‐ 2. "Redial" ber.
Contact with more than one stored phone number.
Call not possible; mobile phone with‐ out reception or network.
For contacts with one stored phone number: select the required contact. The connection is being established. 3. Select the desired entry and the phone For contacts with more than one stored phone number if necessary. number: select the required contact and the The connection is established. phone number. The connection is being estab‐ lished. Deleting a single entry or all entries Editing a contact The deletion of entries depends on your partic‐ ular mobile phone. Changing the entries in "Contacts". When a contact is changed, the changes are not stored 1. Highlight the entry. on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is 2. Open "Options". stored in the vehicle. 3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list" 1. Highlight the contact. 2. Open "Options". Saving an entry in the contacts 3. "Edit entry" 1. Highlight the entry. The contact can be edited. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing Redialing contact" 4. Select the contact if necessary. General information 5. Select the type of number: "Home", The list of dialed numbers in the mobile phone "Business", "Mobile" or "Other" is transmitted to the vehicle depending on the mobile phone. Possibly only those numbers are 6. Complete the entries if necessary. displayed that were dialed from the vehicle. 7. "Store contact" The 20 phone numbers dialed last are dis‐ played. The sorting order of the phone num‐ Received calls bers depends on the particular mobile phone. Displaying calls The list of received calls on the mobile phone is transmitted to the vehicle, depending on the particular mobile phone. It is possible that only
184 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 185
Bluetooth hands-free system COMMUNICATION
those calls are displayed that were received in Hands-free system the vehicle. The 20 telephone calls that were last received General information are displayed. The sorting order and display of Calls that are being made on the hands-free the phone numbers depends on the particular system can be continued on the mobile phone mobile phone. and vice versa. 1. "Telephone" From the mobile phone to the hands- 2. "Received calls" free system Calls that were begun outside of the Bluetooth range of the vehicle can be continued on the hands-free system with the ignition switched on. Depending on the mobile phone, the system automatically switches to the hands-free sys‐ tem. If the system does not switch over automati‐ cally, follow the instructions on the mobile phone display; refer also to the mobile phone Calling a number from the list operating instructions. Selecting an entry. The connection is established. From the hands-free system to the mobile phone Deleting a single entry or all entries Calls that are made on the hands-free system The deletion of entries depends on your partic‐ can in some cases be continued on the mobile ular mobile phone. phone; this depends on the mobile phone. 1. Highlight the entry. Follow the instructions on the mobile phone display; refer also to the mobile phone operat‐ 2. Open "Options". ing instructions. 3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list"
Saving an entry in the contacts Contacts 1. Highlight the entry. 2. Open "Options". General information 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing Contacts can be created and edited. contact" Contacts can be created and edited and the ad‐ 4. Select the contact if necessary. dresses can be adopted as destinations for nav‐ igation. 5. Select the type of number: "Home", "Business", "Mobile" or "Other" 6. Complete the entries if necessary. 7. "Store contact"
185 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 186
COMMUNICATION Bluetooth hands-free system
New contact My contacts 1. "Contacts" General information 2. "New contact" List of all contacts stored in the vehicle.
Displaying contacts 1. "Contacts" 2. "My contacts"
3. The entry fields are still filled with the previ‐ ous entries: "Delete input fields" 4. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next to the entry field.
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. De‐ pending on the number of contacts, an A-Z search is offered. A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts:
Symbol Storage location No sym‐ In the vehicle; the address has not bol been checked as a destination. 5. Enter the text, refer to page 22. In the vehicle; the address has If the vehicle is equipped with a navigation been checked as a destination. system: enter the address. Only addresses contained in the navigation data in the ve‐ Mobile phone hicle can be entered. This ensures that des‐ tination guidance is possible for all ad‐ dresses. 6. If necessary, "Store" 7. "Store contact in vehicle"
Specifying the home address A home address can be stored. It appears at the top of the contact list.
1. "Home" 2. Create a contact. 3. "Store contact in vehicle"
186 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 187
Bluetooth hands-free system COMMUNICATION
Editing a contact Selecting the sorting order of the 1. Select the desired contact. names 2. "Edit contact" Names can be displayed in a different order. 1. "My contacts" 2. Open "Options". 3. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first, last name" Depending on how the contacts are stored on the mobile phone, the sorting order of the names may differ from the selected sorting or‐ der.
3. Change the entries. Deleting contacts 4. Move the MINI joystick to the left. 1. "My contacts" 5. "Yes" 2. Highlight the contact. If a contact from the mobile phone is edited, 3. Open "Options". the changes are not stored on the mobile 4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts" phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehi‐ cle, and only this copy is displayed. Under cer‐ tain circumstances, a contact entry with the same name is created.
Selecting the contact as a navigation destination 1. Select the desired contact. 2. Select the address. 3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination"
Checking the address as a destination An address that is to be used for destination guidance must match the navigation data con‐ tained in the vehicle. The address can be checked for this purpose. 1. Select the desired contact and highlight the address. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Check as destination" 4. Correct and store the address if necessary.
187 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 188
COMMUNICATION Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package
Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package
Vehicle equipment Using the mobile phone while driving Make entries only when traffic and road This chapter describes all series equipment as conditions allow. Do not hold the mobile phone well as country-specific and special equipment in your hand while you are driving; use the offered for this model series. Therefore, it also hands-free system instead. If you do not ob‐ describes equipment that may not be found in serve this precaution, you can endanger the ve‐ your vehicle, for instance due to the selected hicle occupants and other road users.◀ special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. Snap-in adapter The snap-in adapter is used to: When using the features and systems described here, adhere to local regulations. ▷ Hold the mobile phone. ▷ Recharge the battery. ▷ Connect the mobile phone to an outside At a glance antenna of the vehicle. This provides for better network reception The concept and consistent sound quality. Mobile phones or other external devices such as audio players can be connected to the vehi‐ Approved mobile phones cle via Bluetooth. Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue‐ Displaying the vehicle identification tooth® SIG, Inc. number and software part number After these devices are paired once, they are The vehicle identification number and software recognized automatically when the ignition is part number are needed to determine which switched on as soon as they are in the vehicle mobile phones are supported by the mobile and can then be operated via the onboard phone preparation package. The software ver‐ monitor, using the buttons on the steering sion of the mobile phone may also be required. wheel, and via voice activation. 1. "Telephone" Depending on their functionality, external devi‐ 2. Open "Options". ces can be used via the vehicle as a telephone or as an audio source. The telephone functions 3. "Bluetooth® info" are described in the following. Operating the 4. "Display system information" audio functions, refer to page 171. These approved mobile phones with a certain Up to four external devices can be paired. software version, support the vehicle functions Certain functions may need to be enabled by described below. the mobile phone provider or service provider. Malfunctions may occur with other mobile phones or software versions.
188 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 189
Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package COMMUNICATION
Do not operate a mobile phone that is con‐ ▷ A number with at least four and a maxi‐ nected to the vehicle on the mobile phone key‐ mum of 16 digits was defined as the Blue‐ pad, as this may lead to a malfunction. tooth passkey. It is only required once for pairing. Notes ▷ The radio ready state is switched on. At high temperatures, the charging function of the mobile phone may be limited and functions Activating/deactivating Bluetooth may not be executed. Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply When using the mobile phone via the vehicle, with all safety guidelines and regulations. note the operating instructions of the mobile 1. "Telephone" phone. 2. Open "Options". 3. "Bluetooth®" Pairing/unpairing the mobile phone
General information The following functions are available: ▷ Use of a mobile phone as a telephone. ▷ Use of a mobile phone as an additional te‐ lephone. ▷ Use of a mobile phone as an audio source. ▷ Use of an audio device as an audio source, Additional functions refer to page 171. Activating/deactivating the additional functions Requirements Activate the functions before pairing to be able ▷ The mobile phone is suitable, refer to to use them in the vehicle. Information on suit‐ page 188. able mobile phones, refer to page 188, that ▷ The mobile phone is ready for operation. support this function. ▷ Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle and on 1. "Telephone" the mobile phone. 2. "Bluetooth® (phone)" ▷ Bluetooth presettings may need to be made on the mobile phone, e.g., for a con‐ 3. Open "Options". nection without confirmation or visibility, 4. "Configure Bluetooth®" refer to the mobile phone operating in‐ 5. Select the desired additional function. structions. ▷ "Additional telephone" ▷ Deactivate Bluetooth audio if necessary. ▷ "Office" ▷ Compare the control number on the Control Display with the control number on the mo‐ ▷ "Bluetooth® audio" bile phone display. Confirm the control 6. "OK" number on the mobile phone and in the An additional function cannot be assigned to a vehicle. telephone while it is deactivated.
189 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 190
COMMUNICATION Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package
Additional telephone 4. To perform additional steps on the mobile A mobile phone can be used as an additional phone, refer to the mobile phone operating telephone. instructions: for instance, search for or con‐ nect the Bluetooth device or a new device. The additional telephone can be used to accept incoming calls, refer to page 193. While a call is The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears active on the additional telephone, received on the mobile phone display. calls are displayed on the Control Display. 5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the mobile phone display. Office 6. You are prompted by the onboard monitor Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text mes‐ or mobile phone to enter the same Blue‐ sages, and e-mails from the mobile phone are tooth passkey. transferred to the vehicle. Enter the passkey and confirm. or Bluetooth audio Compare the control number on the vehicle A mobile phone can be used as an audio display with the control number on the mo‐ source. bile phone display. Confirm the control "Bluetooth® audio" number on the mobile phone and in the To use a mobile phone in the vehicle as a tele‐ vehicle. phone only, deactivate the function and recon‐ "OK" nect the mobile phone.
Pairing and connecting a mobile phone Pairing the mobile phone To avoid becoming distracted and posing an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi‐ cle's occupants and to other road users, only pair the mobile phone while the vehicle is sta‐ tionary.◀ 1. "Telephone" 7. Select the functions for which the mobile phone is to be used. 2. "Bluetooth® (phone)" 3. "Add new phone" The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐ played.
8. "OK" 9. Move the MINI joystick to the left.
190 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 191
Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package COMMUNICATION
If the pairing was successful, the mobile phone 3. Select the mobile phone that is to be con‐ appears at the top of the list of mobile phones. nected. The functions supported by the mobile phone and audio device are displayed as symbols when paired. White symbol: the function is active. Gray symbol: the function is inactive.
Symbol Function Telephone.
Additional telephone. The functions assigned to the mobile phone Audio source. before unpairing are assigned to the mobile phone when it is reconnected. These functions Four mobile phones can be paired with the ve‐ are deactivated in a mobile phone that is al‐ hicle at once. Three mobile phones can be con‐ ready connected. nected with the vehicle at once. Device options If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., re‐ fer to page 192. Device options can be activated or deactivated for paired and connected devices. Following the initial pairing Configuring the mobile phone ▷ The mobile phone is detected/connected in the vehicle within a short period of time Additional functions can be activated or deacti‐ when the engine is running or the ignition vated for paired and connected mobile phones. is switched on. 1. "Telephone" ▷ The phone book entries of the telephone 2. "Bluetooth® (phone)" stored on the SIM card or mobile phone are 3. Highlight the mobile phone to be config‐ transmitted to the vehicle after detection, ured. depending on the mobile phone. 4. Open "Options". ▷ Specific settings may be necessary in some mobile phones, e.g., authorization or a se‐ 5. "Configure phone" cure connection; refer to the mobile phone operating instructions.
Connecting a particular mobile phone 1. "Telephone" 2. "Bluetooth® (phone)" All paired mobile phones are listed.
6. At least one function must be selected. ▷ "Telephone"
191 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 192
COMMUNICATION Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package
▷ "Additional telephone" 3. Highlight the device that is to be unpaired. ▷ "Audio" 4. Open "Options". 7. "OK" 5. "Remove phone from list" If a function has already been assigned to an‐ other connected mobile phone, the function is deactivated in that mobile phone and the mo‐ bile phone is unpaired when the function is as‐ signed to a new mobile phone.
Swapping the telephone and additional telephone If a phone and additional phone are connected to the vehicle, the function can be swapped be‐ tween the two devices. What to do if... 1. "Telephone" Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to page 188. 2. "Bluetooth® (phone)" The mobile phone could not be paired or con‐ 3. "Swap phone/addit. phone" nected. Using a mobile phone as an audio ▷ Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and on source the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in the vehicle and on the mobile phone. An audio-capable mobile phone can be used as an audio source. Activate Bluetooth audio, refer ▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile to page 190. phone and the vehicle match? Enter the same passkey on the mobile phone and via Pair the mobile phone with the vehicle and the onboard monitor. connect it, refer to page 190. ▷ A multi-character passkey may be needed. The mobile phone is used as the audio source, provided that another device has not been con‐ ▷ Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter nected as the audio source. the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure. If another device has already been connected ▷ Are too many Bluetooth devices connected as the audio source: to the mobile phone or vehicle? Delete con‐ nections with other devices if necessary. 1. Pair the mobile phone with the vehicle and ▷ Is the audio connection activated? Deacti‐ connect it, refer to page 190. vate the audio connection. 2. "Use for audio" ▷ Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or The mobile phone is connected as an audio does it have only a limited remaining bat‐ source. The previous audio source is no lon‐ tery life? Charge the mobile phone in the ger connected to the vehicle. snap-in adapter or via the charging cable. ▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi‐ Unpairing a device ble that only one mobile phone can be con‐ 1. "Telephone" nected to the vehicle. Unpair the connected 2. "Bluetooth® (phone)" mobile phone from the vehicle and pair All paired devices are listed. and connect only one mobile phone.
192 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 193
Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package COMMUNICATION
The mobile phone no longer reacts. Controls ▷ Switch the mobile phone off and on again. ▷ Is the ambient temperature too high or Adjusting the volume low? Do not expose the mobile phone to extreme environmental conditions. The telephone functions are not available. ▷ Is the mobile phone paired as an additional telephone and is the additional telephone function deactivated? Activate the function. ▷ Is an outgoing call not possible? Connect the mobile phone as a telephone. No phone book entries or only some phone Turn the knob until the desired volume is se‐ book entries are displayed, or they are incom‐ lected. The setting is stored for the remote con‐ plete. trol currently in use. ▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is not yet complete. The vehicle automatically adjusts the volume of ▷ It is possible that only the phone book en‐ the microphone on the telephone and the vol‐ tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card ume of the called party. Depending on the mo‐ are transmitted. bile phone, the volumes may need to be ad‐ justed. ▷ It may not be possible to display phone book entries with special characters. The settings can only be created during a call and must be adjusted separately for each tele‐ ▷ The number of phone book entries to be phone. The settings are deleted when the tele‐ stored is too high. phone is unpaired. ▷ Is the data volume of the contact too large, e. g., due to stored information such as 1. "Settings" notes? Reduce the data volume of the con‐ 2. "Tone" tact. 3. "Volume settings" ▷ Is the mobile phone connected as an audio 4. Select the desired setting: "Microphone" or source or additional telephone? The mobile "Loudspeak." phone must be connected as a telephone. 5. To set: turn the MINI joystick. The phone connection quality is poor. 6. To save: press the MINI joystick. ▷ The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the mobile phone can be adjusted, depending Incoming call on the mobile phone. ▷ Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in Receiving calls adapter or place it in the area of the center If the number of the caller is stored in the console. phone book and is transmitted by the network, ▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone and the name of the contact is displayed. Other‐ loudspeakers separately. wise, only the phone number is displayed. If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available, con‐ tact Customer Relations or the service center.
193 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 194
COMMUNICATION Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package
If more than one phone number is assigned to 2. "End call" a contact, only the name of the contact is dis‐ played. For calls on the additional telephone, the num‐ ber is only displayed if it is transmitted by the network. An incoming call to one of the telephones is au‐ tomatically rejected if there is an active call on the other telephone.
Accepting a call Press the button on the steering Entering a phone number wheel. Dialing a number or 1. "Telephone" "Accept" 2. "Dial number" 3. Select the digits individually. 4. Select the symbol.
Rejecting a call "Reject" The phone number can also be entered by The caller is redirected to the mailbox if the voice. mailbox was activated Calls with multiple parties Ending a call Press the button on the steering General information wheel. You can switch between calls or connect two calls to a single conference call. These functions or must be supported by the mobile phone and 1. "Telephone" service provider.
Accepting a call while speaking to another party This function might have to be activated by the service provider and the mobile phone must be adjusted accordingly.
194 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 195
Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package COMMUNICATION
If a second call comes in during an ongoing call, 2. "Conference call" a call waiting signal is sounded. "Accept" The call is accepted and the existing call is put on hold.
Establishing a second call Establish an additional call during an active call. 1. "Telephone" 2. "Active calls" When terminating a conference call, both calls 3. "Hold" are ended. If one call is terminated by another The existing call is put on hold. party, the other call can be continued. Switching the microphone to mute When a call is active, the microphone can be muted.
1. "Telephone" 2. "Active calls" 3. "Microphone mute"
4. Dial the new phone number or select it from a list. "Return" The call on hold is resumed.
Switching between two calls, hold call Active call: highlighted. Call on hold identified by: "on hold...". A microphone that has been switched to mute Select the symbol to change to the call on is automatically reactivated: hold. ▷ When a new connection is established. ▷ When switching between call parties. Establishing a conference call Two calls can be connected to a single tele‐ DTMF suffix dialing phone conference call. DTMF suffix dialing can be used for gaining ac‐ 1. Establish two calls. cess to network services or for controlling devi‐ ces, e.g., to make a remote inquiry of an an‐
195 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 196
COMMUNICATION Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package
swering machine. The DTMF code is needed for Calling a contact this purpose. Symbol Meaning 1. "Telephone" Contact with one stored phone num‐ 2. Select the contact from a list or "Dial ber. number". 3. "Keypad dialing" Contact with more than one stored phone number.
Call not possible; mobile phone with‐ out reception or network.
For contacts with one stored phone number: select the required contact. The connection is being established. For contacts with more than one stored phone number: select the required contact and the 4. Enter the DTMF code on the onboard moni‐ phone number. The connection is being estab‐ tor. lished. DTMF suffix dialing is not possible during con‐ ference calls. Editing a contact Changing the entries in "Contacts". When a Phone book contact is changed, the changes are not stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is Displays stored in the vehicle. The phone book accesses the contacts and 1. Highlight the contact. shows all contacts for which a phone number has been stored. The entries can be selected to 2. Open "Options". make a call. 3. "Edit entry" 1. "Telephone" The contact can be edited. 2. "Phone book" Redialing A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts. General information The list of dialed numbers in the mobile phone is transmitted to the vehicle depending on the mobile phone. Possibly only those numbers are displayed that were dialed from the vehicle. The 20 phone numbers dialed last are dis‐ played. The sorting order of the phone num‐ bers depends on the particular mobile phone.
196 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 197
Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package COMMUNICATION
Dialing a number on the onboard those calls are displayed that were received in monitor the vehicle. 1. "Telephone" The 20 telephone calls that were last received 2. "Redial" are displayed. The sorting order and display of the phone numbers depends on the particular mobile phone. 1. "Telephone" 2. "Received calls"
3. Select the desired entry and the phone number if necessary. The connection is established.
Deleting a single entry or all entries The deletion of entries depends on your partic‐ Calling a number from the list ular mobile phone. Selecting an entry. 1. Highlight the entry. The connection is established. 2. Open "Options". Deleting a single entry or all entries 3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list" The deletion of entries depends on your partic‐ ular mobile phone. Saving an entry in the contacts 1. Highlight the entry. 1. Highlight the entry. 2. Open "Options". 2. Open "Options". 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing 3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list" contact" Saving an entry in the contacts 4. Select the contact if necessary. 1. Highlight the entry. 5. Select the type of number: "Home", "Business", "Mobile" or "Other" 2. Open "Options". 6. Complete the entries if necessary. 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing contact" 7. "Store contact" 4. Select the contact if necessary. Received calls 5. Select the type of number: "Home", "Business", "Mobile" or "Other" Displaying calls 6. Complete the entries if necessary. The list of received calls on the mobile phone is 7. "Store contact" transmitted to the vehicle, depending on the particular mobile phone. It is possible that only
197 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 198
COMMUNICATION Bluetooth mobile phone preparation package
Snap-in adapter To remove: To remove the snap-in adapter, press the but‐ General information ton. More information on compatible snap-in adapters that support the functions of the mo‐ Inserting the mobile phone bile phone is available at the service center. 1. Depending on the mobile phone, remove the protective cap from the antenna con‐ Notes nector and from the USB connection of the mobile phone. At high temperatures, the charging function of the mobile phone may be limited and functions 2. With the buttons facing up, slide the mobile may not be executed. phone up toward the electrical contacts, ar‐ row 1, and press it down until it engages, When using the mobile phone via the vehicle, arrow 2. note the operating instructions of the mobile phone.
Installation position In the center armrest.
Inserting/removing the snap-in adapter 1. Press the button, arrow 1, and remove the cover, arrow 2.
The battery is charged beginning with the radio ready state of the vehicle.
Removing the mobile phone
2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front, ar‐ row 1, and press down, arrow 2, until it en‐ gages.
Press the button, arrow 1, and remove the mo‐ bile phone, arrow 2.
198 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 199
Office COMMUNICATION
Office
Vehicle equipment phones, data access must be confirmed on the mobile phone. This chapter describes all series equipment as ▷ The time, time zone, and date, refer to well as country-specific and special equipment page 71, are correctly set on the Control offered for this model series. Therefore, it also Display and on the mobile phone, for in‐ describes equipment that may not be found in stance to correctly display appointments. your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This Updating also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ Data are updated every time the mobile phone tems. is connected to the vehicle. Appointment en‐ When using the features and systems described tries, tasks, notes and reminders can be up‐ here, adhere to local regulations. dated separately. 1. "Office" At a glance 2. "Current office", "Calendar", "Tasks", "Notes" or "Reminders" General information 3. Open "Options". Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text mes‐ 4. "Update data" sages, and e-mails from the mobile phone can Mobile phone data are transmitted again to be displayed on the Control Display if the mo‐ the vehicle. bile phone provides compatible support of these functions and the necessary Bluetooth standards. Office information Information about which mobile phones and functions are available can be found at The number of unread messages and active www.mini.com/connectivity. tasks as well as the upcoming appointments Contents are only displayed in full length when are displayed. the vehicle is stationary. 1. "Office" The mobile phone has read-access only. 2. "Current office" Do not use Office while driving 3. Select the desired entry to display details. To avoid becoming distracted and posing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occu‐ pants and to other road users, never attempt to use the controls or enter information unless traffic and road conditions allow this.◀
Requirements ▷ A suitable mobile phone is paired with the vehicle and connected. In some mobile
199 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 200
COMMUNICATION Office
Contacts The connection is established.
At a glance Editing a contact 1. Select the desired contact. Contacts can be created and edited. The con‐ tacts from the mobile phone are displayed as 2. "Edit contact" well if this function is supported by the mobile phone. The addresses can be adopted as destinations for navigation and the phone numbers can be dialed.
Displaying contacts
General information 1. "Office" 3. Change the entries. 2. "Contacts" 4. "Store contact in vehicle" When a contact is edited, the changes are not stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the en‐ try is stored in the vehicle.
Selecting the contact as a navigation destination 1. Select the desired contact. 2. Select the address. When contacts from the mobile phone are All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. De‐ used, the address may need to be matched pending on the number of contacts, an A-Z to the navigation data contained in the ve‐ search is offered. hicle. In this case: A symbol indicates the storage location of the Correct the address. contacts.
Symbol Storage location No sym‐ In the vehicle; the address has not bol been checked as a destination.
In the vehicle; the address has been checked as a destination.
Mobile phone.
Dialing a phone number 3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination" 1. Select the desired contact. 2. Select the phone number.
200 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 201
Office COMMUNICATION
Checking the address as a destination hicle can be entered. This ensures that des‐ An address that is to be used for destination tination guidance is possible for all ad‐ guidance must match the navigation data con‐ dresses. tained in the vehicle. The address can be If necessary, "Accept address" checked for this purpose. 9. "Store contact in vehicle" 1. Select the desired contact and highlight the address. Contact types 2. Open "Options". Various contact types can be assigned to phone numbers and addresses. 3. "Check as destination" Symbol Meaning 4. Correct and store the address if necessary. If the address is corrected and stored, a copy of Home phone number. it is stored in the vehicle. The address is not Business phone number. changed on the mobile phone. Mobile phone number. New contact Other phone number.
General information Home address.
A contact can have up to 8 phone numbers, Business address. 2 addresses, 3 e-mail addresses and one Inter‐ net address. Specifying the home address 1. "Office" A home address can be stored. It appears at 2. "Contacts" the top of the contact list. 3. Open "Options". 1. "Office" 4. "New contact" 2. "Contacts" 3. "Home" 4. Create a contact. 5. "Store contact in vehicle"
Selecting the sorting order of the names Names can be displayed in a different order.
1. "Office" 5. The entry fields are still filled with the previ‐ 2. "Contacts" ous entries: "Delete input fields" 3. Open "Options". 6. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next to the entry field. 4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first, last name" 7. Enter the text and assign the contact type. Depending on how the contacts were stored on 8. If the vehicle is equipped with a navigation the mobile phone, the sorting order of the system: enter the address. Only addresses contained in the navigation data in the ve‐
201 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 202
COMMUNICATION Office
names may differ from the selected sorting or‐ the vehicle is stationary. Messages from the ad‐ der. ditional telephone are not transmitted.
Show contact pictures Displaying messages Pictures stored with the contacts are stored in 1. "Office" the vehicle when the mobile phone is con‐ 2. "Messages" nected to the vehicle. The number of transmit‐ A symbol identifies the type of message. ted pictures depends on the mobile phone. The mobile phone must support this function. Symbol Message type 1. "Office" Text messages. 2. "Contacts" E-mail from mobile phone. 3. Open "Options". 4. "Configure Bluetooth®" Filtering the message list 5. "Show images" The message list can be filtered if more than Display of all contact pictures is activated or de‐ one type of message exists. activated. 1. "Filter:" 2. Select the type of message. Deleting contacts ▷ "All" Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone All messages are displayed. cannot be deleted. ▷ "Text message" 1. "Office" Only text messages from the mobile phone are displayed. 2. "Contacts" ▷ "E-mail" 3. Highlight the contact. Only e-mails from the mobile phone 4. Open "Options". are displayed. 5. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts" Text messages
Messages Calling the sender of a text message 1. Select the desired message. General information 2. Select the symbol. Whether or not text messages and e-mails from the mobile phone are displayed depends on Saving the sender in the contacts whether transmission from the mobile phone 1. Highlight the desired message. to the vehicle is supported. Text messages and e-mails may not be supported by the service 2. Open "Options". provider, or the function may need to be ena‐ 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing bled separately. After the mobile phone is first contact" paired, transmission may take several minutes. Messages are only displayed in full length when
202 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 203
Office COMMUNICATION
Using contact data Reading the e-mail out loud Contact data from appointments, tasks, text Read the e-mail out loud, refer to page 205. messages, e-mails, and notes can be stored or selected, refer to page 205. Calendar Reading the text message out loud Read the text message out loud, refer to Display the calendar page 205. Appointments during the last 20 days and the next 50 days can be displayed. E-mail 1. "Office" Displaying e-mails 2. "Calendar" 1. "Office" The appointments on the current day are 2. "Messages" displayed. 3. Select the desired e-mail. Selecting the calendar day Displaying e-mail contacts 1. Select the date. If the sender and recipient of an e-mail are transmitted by the mobile phone, this informa‐ tion is displayed in the e-mail. "Sender/Recipient" If the e-mail addresses are stored in the con‐ tacts, the contact is displayed. Select the con‐ tact to display details. If the e-mail addresses are not stored in the contacts, only the e-mail address is displayed. 2. Select the desired day or date. Using contact data ▷ "Next day" Contact data from appointments, tasks, text ▷ "Date:" messages, e-mails, and notes can be stored or ▷ "Previous day" selected, refer to page 205. ▷ "Today"
Deactivating the full display Display the appointment When an e-mail is opened in the vehicle, the e- 1. Select the desired appointment. mail is fully transmitted to the vehicle. This may result in charges. 2. Scroll through the appointment if neces‐ sary: 1. "Office" ▷ Turn the MINI joystick. 2. "Messages" ▷ Select the symbol. 3. Open "Options". 4. "Fully download e-mails" Only a part of the e-mail from the mobile phone is loaded into the vehicle.
203 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 204
COMMUNICATION Office
Using contact data Using contact data Contact data from appointments, tasks, text Contact data from appointments, tasks, text messages, e-mails, and notes can be stored or messages, e-mails, and notes can be stored or selected, refer to page 205. selected, refer to page 205.
Reading the appointment out loud Reading the task out loud Read the appointment out loud, refer to Read the task out loud, refer to page 205. page 205.
Notes Tasks Displaying notes Displaying the task list 1. "Office" Display tasks that are due within the next 2. "Notes" 90 days. All notes are displayed. 1. "Office" 2. "Tasks" Displaying the note 1. Select the desired note. Sorting the task list 1. Select the header in the task list.
2. Scroll in the note if necessary: ▷ Turn the MINI joystick. 2. Select the sorting criterion: ▷ Select the symbol. ▷ "Priority (!)" ▷ "Subject" Using contact data ▷ "Due date" Contact data from appointments, tasks, text messages, e-mails, and notes can be stored or Displaying the task selected, refer to page 205. 1. Select the desired task. Reading the note out loud 2. Scroll in the task if necessary: Read the note out loud, refer to page 205. ▷ Turn the MINI joystick. ▷ Select the symbol.
204 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 205
Office COMMUNICATION
Reminders Storing contact data 1. "Use contact data" Displaying reminders 2. Highlight the phone number or e-mail ad‐ Reminders of pending appointments and tasks dress. are displayed. After an appointment or after a 3. Open "Options". task is due, the reminder is no longer displayed. 4. "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new 1. "Office" contact" 2. "Reminders" 3. Select the desired reminder. Reading out loud The corresponding appointment or the task are displayed. Text messages, e-mails, appointment entries, tasks, and notes can be read out loud. 1. Select the desired message, appointment, Using contact data task, or note. 2. Select the symbol. At a glance The following options are available during Contact data from appointments, tasks, text reading: messages, e-mails, and notes can be stored or selected. ▷ "Pause" Interrupt reading. Select again to restart Displaying contact or selecting phone reading. number ▷ "Back to beginning" 1. "Use contact data" Start reading the message again from the beginning. ▷ Select the symbol. Go back one paragraph. ▷ Select the symbol. Skip a paragraph. ▷ To end reading, move the MINI joystick to the left.
2. Display the contact or select the phone number: What to do if... ▷ Select the contact to display contact de‐ Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to tails. page 188. ▷ Select the phone number to establish a Appointments, tasks, notes, text messages, or connection directly. e-mails from the mobile phone are not dis‐ played.
205 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 206
COMMUNICATION Office
▷ The mobile phone is not capable of the missing function or is not connected cor‐ rectly. ▷ The Office function is deactivated. ▷ The mobile phone is connected as an addi‐ tional phone. ▷ Appointments are older than 20 days or are more than 50 days in the future. ▷ The tasks have been marked as completed or have a due date that lies more than 90 days in the future. ▷ Depending on the number of stored ap‐ pointments, task notes, and messages in the mobile phone, not all are displayed in the vehicle. Not all appointments and tasks from the mobile phone are displayed at the right time? ▷ The time zone, time, or date is incorrectly set on the Control Display and mobile phone. Entries are not displayed in full length. ▷ Text were already transmitted from the mobile phone in a shortened form. ▷ Synchronization between the mobile phone and vehicle may take several minutes. The contact pictures are not being displayed? ▷ Up to 200 contact pictures can be stored in the vehicle. If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available, please contact the hotline or service center.
206 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 207
MINI Connected COMMUNICATION
MINI Connected
Vehicle equipment Create the entries. Make entries only when traffic and road This chapter describes all series equipment as conditions allow. Otherwise, the vehicle occu‐ well as country-specific and special equipment pants and other road users may be put in dan‐ offered for this model series. Therefore, it also ger because of the distraction from driving. describes equipment that may not be found in For reasons of safety, some software applica‐ your vehicle, for instance due to the selected tions are usable only while the vehicle is sta‐ special equipment or the country version. This tionary.◀ also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. Software applications When using the features and systems described Use only software applications approved here, adhere to local regulations. by the manufacturer of your MINI; otherwise, malfunctions may occur.◀ At a glance Connecting the mobile The concept Certain software applications of a suitable mo‐ phone bile phone can be integrated in the vehicle. These software applications are displayed on Connection via the USB audio interface the Control Display. The USB audio interface is in the They are operated via the onboard monitor. center console. The scope of the software applications may Connect the mobile phone to the vary by country. USB interface and the AV-IN port using a special adapter cable Requirements available from the service center.
▷ The mobile phone is suitable. To perform additional steps on the mobile ▷ The mobile phone operating system sup‐ phone, refer to the mobile phone operating in‐ ports the software applications of MINI structions: for instance, selecting and activating Connected. software applications. ▷ Software applications are installed on the mobile phone and ready to use. Connection via the snap-in adapter ▷ Corresponding mobile wireless contract. The mobile phone can also be connected, refer to page 198, via the snap-in adapter. Any additionally incurred costs are not a part of MINI Connected. Information about suitable mobile phones, Operating MINI Connected available software applications, and their instal‐ lation can be obtained at www.mini.com/ After the mobile phone is successfully con‐ connectivity or from the service center. nected with the vehicle and MINI Connected is started, the applications are displayed on the
207 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 208
COMMUNICATION MINI Connected
Control Display and can be operated using the If necessary, restart the software applica‐ MINI joystick. tion on the mobile phone after a phone The volume can be set using the following con‐ conversation. trols: ▷ Audio and video playback from the snap-in adapter is only possible if no cable is con‐ nected to the AV-IN port. ▷ Buttons on the steering wheel or ▷ Volume button on the radio, refer to PlugIn page 156. The concept 1. Connect the mobile phone via the snap-in adapter or via the USB audio interface. Selected functions of a compatible Apple de‐ vice can be displayed on the Control Display via 2. Press the button. The main menu is a video connection. They are operated using opened. the MINI joystick and the button on the MINI joystick. 3. "MINI Connected" Functional requirement ▷ Suitable iPhone or iPod: as of iPhone 3GS or iPod with software version iOS 4.1 and higher. ▷ The MINI Connected app is not required. Information on compatible adapters and inter‐ faces can be obtained from the service center.
Activating 4. Select the desired software application. 1. Connect the Apple device. Notes Operation takes place via the MINI joystick ▷ The scope of MINI Connected that can be with its buttons. displayed on the Control Display depends 2. "MINI Connected" on the range of software applications in‐ 3. "PlugIn" stalled on the mobile phone. 4. Select the connection type: "Activate via ▷ The data transmission of the software ap‐ AUX connection" or"Activate via Snap-In plications from the mobile phone to the ve‐ adapter" hicle can last some time. Some software 5. "Activate PlugIn" applications depend on the speed of the available Internet connection of the mobile 6. Use the MINI joystick to navigate among phone. the displayed functions and select, for ex‐ ample, a desired category or track. ▷ Some mobile phones cannot simultane‐ ously use MINI Connected and the Blue‐ tooth hands-free system. Controls The PlugIn is activated to display the graphic output of the connected device on the Control
208 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 209
MINI Connected COMMUNICATION
Display. This changes the operating functions of ▷ Press 2x: opens the main menu. the MINI joystick and the MINI buttons until the ▷ Press 1x and move the MINI joystick to the PlugIn is deactivated again. left 1x: opens the MINI Connected menu. The operation of the PlugIn depends on the iOS ▷ Press 1x and move the MINI joystick to the version in use, e.g., iOS 4.1. left 2x. Opens the main menu.
Home button Via the audio source button
Press the button to select the following functions: Press 1x: changes to the audio source ▷ Press 1x: opens the display menu bar. selected last. ▷ Press 2x: opens the main menu. ▷ Press 1x and move the MINI joystick to the left 1x: opens the MINI Connected menu. ▷ Press 1x and move the MINI joystick to the left 2x: opens the main menu.
Toggle button
Press the button to select the following functions. ▷ Press 1x: return to the next higher menu level of the iPhones/iPods.
MINI joystick ▷ Press: selection/play/pause. ▷ Turn: navigate through the lists. ▷ Move to the left: jump to the beginning of the current music track or to the previous music track in the playback list. ▷ Move the left and hold: reverse. ▷ Move to the right: jump to the next music track in the playback list. ▷ Move to the right and hold: fast forward.
Deactivating There are several methods of deactivating the PlugIn and returning to the MINI operating level.
Via the home button ▷ Press 1x: returns to activating the PlugIn.
209 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15
MOVE ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATION
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 212
MOBILITY Refueling
Refueling
Vehicle equipment Fuel cap This chapter describes all series equipment as Opening well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series. Therefore, it also 1. Open fuel filler flap. describes equipment that may not be found in 2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise. your vehicle, for instance due to the selected 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached special equipment or the country version. This to the fuel filler flap. also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using the features and systems described here, adhere to local regulations.
General information Refuel promptly At the latest, refuel at a range below 30 miles/50 km; otherwise, the engine function Closing is not ensured and damage may occur.◀ 1. Fit the fuel cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click. Notes 2. Close the fuel filler flap. Do not pinch the retaining strap Switch off the engine before refueling Do not pinch the retaining strap attached Always switch off the engine before refu‐ to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed eling; otherwise, fuel cannot be added to the properly and fuel vapors can escape.◀ tank and a message will be displayed.◀ A message is displayed if the cap is loose or Observe when handling fuel missing. ▷ Take all precautionary measures and observe all applicable regulations Manually unlocking fuel filler flap when handling fuel. In the event of a malfunction, the fuel filler flap ▷ Do not carry any spare fuel containers in can be released manually: your vehicle. They can develop a leak and MINI Countryman: cause an explosion or cause a fire in the event of an accident.◀
212 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 213
Refueling MOBILITY
Handling fuels Follow the safety instructions provided at gas stations; otherwise, there is a danger of personal injury and property damage.◀
Fuel tank capacity Approx. 12.3 US gal/47 liters, including a re‐ MINI Paceman: serve capacity of 2.1 US gal/8 liters.
1. Open the cargo area trim, arrow. 2. Pull the green knob with the gas pump symbol. This opens the fuel filler flap.
Observe the following when refueling When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com‐ pletely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel pump nozzle during refueling causes: ▷ Premature pump shutoff. ▷ Reduced efficiency in the fuel-vapor recov‐ ery system. The fuel tank is full after refueling is resumed twice after the filler nozzle switches off for the first time. Do not overfill the fuel tank Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise, escaping fuel may harm the environment or damage the vehicle.◀
213 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 214
MOBILITY Fuel
Fuel
Fuel recommendation The engine is knock controlled. Therefore, you can refuel with different recommended fuel Vehicle equipment grades. This chapter describes all series equipment as Recommended fuel grade well as country-specific and special equipment The manufacturer of your MINI recommends: offered for this model series. Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in ▷ AKI 91. your vehicle, for instance due to the selected ▷ John Cooper Works AKI 93. special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ Minimum fuel grade tems. The manufacturer of your MINI recommends When using the features and systems described AKI 89. here, adhere to local regulations. Minimum fuel grade Gasoline Do not fill up with fuel below the speci‐ fied minimum quality; otherwise, the engine For the best fuel economy, the gasoline should may not run properly.◀ be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. Do not use fuels that are labeled at the fuel If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI rat‐ pump as containing metals. ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures. Only refuel with lead-free gasoline with‐ This has no effect on the engine life. out metal additives Minimum fuel grade Do not refuel with leaded gasoline or gasoline with metal additives, e. g., manganese or iron; The use of poor-quality fuels may result in otherwise, the catalytic converter and other harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition‐ components will be permanently damaged.◀ ally, problems relating to drivability, starting and stalling, especially under certain environ‐ Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of mental conditions such as high ambient tem‐ 10 %, i.e., E10, may be used for refueling. perature and high altitude, may occur. The ethanol should fulfill the following quality If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐ standards: ommend switching to a high quality gasoline US: ASTM 4806–xx brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐ CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐ gine deposits, it is highly recommended to pur‐ xx: always adhere to the currently applicable chase gasoline from BP or Top Tier retailers. standard. Failure to comply with these recommendations Do not refuel with ethanol E85 may result in the need for unscheduled mainte‐ Do not refuel with E85, i.e., fuel with an nance.◀ ethanol content of 85 %, or with Flex Fuel, as this would damage the engine and fuel supply system.◀
214 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 215
Fuel MOBILITY
215 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 216
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Wheels and tires
Vehicle equipment Tires warm up during driving and the tire infla‐ tion pressure increases as the temperature This chapter describes all series equipment as rises. The tire inflation pressure specifications well as country-specific and special equipment apply to cold tires or tires at ambient tempera‐ offered for this model series. Therefore, it also ture. describes equipment that may not be found in Only check the tire inflation pressure when the your vehicle, for instance due to the selected tires are cold. This means after a maximum of special equipment or the country version. This 1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ has been parked for at least 2 hours. When the tems. tires are warm, the tire inflation pressure is When using the features and systems described higher. here, adhere to local regulations. After correcting the tire inflation pressure, reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 87 or reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to Tire inflation pressure page 85.
Safety information Pressure specifications It is not merely the tires' service life, but also The tables below provide all the correct infla‐ driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving tion pressures for the specified tire sizes at am‐ safety that depend on the condition of the tires bient temperature. and the maintenance of the specified tire pres‐ The inflation pressures apply to the tire sizes sure. approved and tire brands recommended by the manufacturer of the MINI; a list of these is Checking the pressure available from the service center. Tires naturally lose pressure uniformly across all For correct identification of the right tire infla‐ four tires. tion pressures, observe the following: Check the tire inflation pressure regularly ▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle Regularly check the tire inflation pressure ▷ Maximum allowable driving speed and correct it as needed: at least twice a month and before a long trip. If you fail to observe this Tire inflation pressures for driving up to precaution, you may be driving on tires with in‐ 100 mph or 160 km/h correct tire pressures, a condition that may not only compromise your vehicle's driving stabil‐ For normal driving up to 100 mph/160 km/h, ity, but also lead to tire damage and the risk of adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation an accident. pressures listed on the following pages in the column for traveling speeds up to 100 mph/ Do not drive with depressurized or flat tires, ex‐ 160 km/h to achieve optimum driving comfort. cept for run-flat tires. A flat tire will seriously impair your vehicle's handling and braking re‐ These tire inflation pressures can also be found sponse. Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead on the driver's side door pillar when the driver's to a loss of control over the vehicle.◀ door is open.
216 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 217
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
MINI Countryman: Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed The permissible maximum speed for these tire inflation pressures is 100 mph/160 km/h. Do not exceed this speed or else there is a risk of tire damage and accidents.◀
Tire inflation pressures for driving above 100 mph or 160 km/h Adjust the tire inflation pressures MINI Paceman: To drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, adjust pressures to the re‐ spective tire inflation pressures listed on the following pages in the column for traveling speeds including those exceeding 100 mph or 160 km/h. Otherwise, tire damage and acci‐ dents could occur.◀ Observe all national and local maximum speed limits; otherwise, violations of the laws could occur.
Tire inflation pressures for MINI Countryman Cooper
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Traveling speeds of up to Traveling speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h 100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature
195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std 2.2/32 2.2/32 2.4/35 2.4/35 205/55 R 17 91 H M+S RSC 205/55 R 17 91 H M+S A/S RSC 205/55 R 17 91 V RSC 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC 225/40 R 19 89 V RSC
More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 259.
217 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 218
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressures for MINI Countryman Cooper S/Countryman Cooper S ALL4
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Traveling speeds of up to Traveling speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h 100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature
195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std 2.2/32 2.2/32 2.6/38 2.6/38 205/55 R 17 91 H M+S RSC 205/55 R 17 91 H M+S A/S RSC 205/55 R 17 91 V RSC 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC 225/40 R 19 89 V RSC
More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 259.
Tire inflation pressures for MINI Countryman John Cooper Works
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Traveling speeds of up to Traveling speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h 100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature
195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std 2.4/35 2.4/35 2.6/38 2.6/38 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC 225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC
225/40 R 19 89 V RSC 2.4/35 2.4/35 2.7/39 2.7/39
More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 259.
218 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 219
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Tire inflation pressures for MINI Paceman Cooper
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Traveling speeds of up to Traveling speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h 100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature
195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std 2.2/32 2.2/32 2.4/35 2.4/35 205/55 R 17 91 H M+S RSC 205/55 R 17 91 H M+S A/S RSC 205/55 R 17 91 V RSC 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC 225/40 R 19 89 V RSC
More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 260.
Tire inflation pressures for MINI Paceman Cooper S / Paceman Cooper S ALL4
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Traveling speeds of up to Traveling speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h 100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature
195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std 2.2/32 2.2/32 2.6/38 2.6/38 205/55 R 17 91 H M+S RSC 205/55 R 17 91 H M+S A/S RSC 205/55 R 17 91 V RSC 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC 225/40 R 19 89 V RSC
More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 260.
219 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 220
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressures for MINI Paceman John Cooper Works
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Traveling speeds of up to Traveling speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h 100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature
195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std 2.4/35 2.4/35 2.7/39 2.7/39 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC 225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC 225/40 R 19 89 V RSC
More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 260.
Tire identification marks Tire Identification Number Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the the U.S. Department of Transportation. tire makes it easier to identify and choose the DOT code: right tires. DOT xxxx xxx 2214 Tire size xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand Example: 225/45 R 17 91 V xxx: tire size and tire design 225: nominal width in mm 2214: tire age 45: aspect ratio in % R: radial tire code Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable 17: rim diameter in inches on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder 91: load rating, not for ZR tires and maximum section width. For example:
Speed letter Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h DOT Quality Grades H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h Treadwear V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h Traction AA A B C W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h Temperature A B C Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
220 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 221
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Conform to Federal Safety Requirements cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A All passenger car tires must conform to represent higher levels of performance on the Federal Safety Requirements in addition to laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐ these grades.◀ quired by law. Temperature grade for this tire Treadwear The temperature grade for this tire is es‐ The treadwear grade is a comparative rating tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and based on the wear rate of the tire when tested not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐ under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ tion, or excessive loading, either separately or ernment test course. For example, a tire graded in combination, can cause heat buildup and 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times possible tire failure.◀ as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires RSC – Run-flat tires depends upon the actual conditions of their The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle use, however, and may depart significantly with the letters RSC on the sidewall, refer to from the norm due to variations in driving hab‐ page 224. its, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. M+S Traction Winter and all-season tires. The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are These have better winter properties than AA, A, B, and C. summer tires. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop XL on wet pavement as measured under control‐ led conditions on specified government test Designation for specially reinforced tires. surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based Tire tread on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hy‐ Summer tires droplaning, or peak traction characteristics. The tread depth should not be less than 0.12 in/3 mm, although European legislation, Temperature for example, requires a minimum tread depth The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, of only 0.063 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths less and C, representing the tire's resistance to the than 0.12 in/3 mm, there is a great danger of generation of heat and its ability to dissipate hydroplaning even in low water depths and at heat when tested under controlled conditions raised speeds. on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐ Winter tires terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire The suitability of winter tires for winter driving life, and excessive temperature can lead to is reduced noticeably when their tread depth sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to becomes less than 0.16 in/4 mm. a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi‐
221 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 222
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Minimum tread depth In case of tire damage If there are indications of tire damage, re‐ duce your speed immediately and have the wheels and tires checked right away; other‐ wise, there is the increased risk of an accident. Drive carefully to the next service center or tire shop. If necessary, have the vehicle towed. Otherwise, tire damage can present a life- threatening hazard to vehicle occupants and Wear indicators in the tread base are distrib‐ other road users.◀ uted around the circumference of the tire and are marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread Repair of tire damage Wear Indicator. When the tire tread has been For safety reasons, the manufacturer of worn down to the wear indicators, a tread has your vehicle recommends that you do not have reached a depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm. damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐ placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐ sult.◀ Tire damage
General information Tire age Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign ob‐ jects lodged in the tread, and tread wear. Recommendation For several reasons, among other things be‐ Notes cause of beginning brittleness, the manufac‐ Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, turer of your MINI recommends mounting new as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can tires at the latest after six years, regardless of cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus‐ the actual wear. pension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning Manufacture date between the wheel and the road. Be careful to The date of manufacture of the tires is specified avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es‐ in the tire label: pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low- DOT … 0315: the tire was manufactured in the profile tires. 3rd week of 2015. Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐ fects: ▷ Unusual vibrations during driving. ▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐ dency to pull to the left or right. Damage can be caused by driving over curbs, road damage and similar situations.
222 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 223
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Changing wheels and Wheels with electronics for TPM Tire Pressure Monitor tires When mounting new tires or changing from summer to winter tires or vice versa, only use Mounting wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise, the Information on mounting tires Tire Pressure Monitor will not be able to detect Have mounting and balancing performed a flat tire, refer to page 86. Your service center only by a service center or tire specialist. will be glad to advise you. If this work is not carried out properly, there is Recommended tire brands the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.◀
Wheel and tire combination Information on the right wheel and tire combi‐ nation and rim version for your vehicle can be obtained from the service center. Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the function of a variety of systems such as ABS or DSC. For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐ To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐ hicle recommends certain tire brands. These sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐ are indicated by the clearly visible marking on figuration from a single manufacturer. the tire sidewall. Following tire damage, have the original wheel With proper use, these tires meet the highest and tire combination remounted on the vehicle standards for safety and handling. as soon as possible. Approved wheels and tires Retreaded tires The manufacturer of your vehicle recom‐ The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐ mends that you use only wheels and tires that ommend the use of retreaded tires. have been approved for your particular vehicle model. Retreaded tires For example, despite having the same official Possibly substantial variations in the de‐ size ratings, variations can lead to body contact sign and age of the tire casing structures can and with it, the risk of severe accidents. limit service life and have a negative impact on road safety.◀ The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot evalu‐ ate non-approved wheels and tires to deter‐ mine if they are suited for use, and therefore Winter tires cannot ensure the operating safety of the vehi‐ The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends cle if they are mounted.◀ winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures below +45 ℉/+7 ℃. Although so-called all-season M+S tires do pro‐ vide better winter traction than summer tires, they do not provide the same level of perform‐ ance as winter tires.
223 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 224
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Maximum speed of winter tires Run-flat tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, Label then display a corresponding sign in the field of vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire specialist or from your service center. Maximum speed for winter tires Do not exceed the maximum speed for the winter tires; otherwise, tire damage and ac‐ cidents can occur.◀
Run-flat tires When mounting new tires or changing from The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle summer to winter tires or vice versa, use run- with the letters RSC on the sidewall. flat tires for your own safety. Also, a compact Run-flat tires are tires that support themselves wheel is not available in case of a flat tire. Your for a limited period of time, and they may also service center will be glad to advise you. come with special rims. The sidewall reinforce‐ ment ensures that the tire can continue to be Rotating wheels between axles used to a limited extent if it has lost pressure Different wear patterns occur on the front and and even if it has become completely depres‐ rear axles, depending on the individual condi‐ surized. tions of use. For continued driving in the event of a flat tire, To ensure even wear on the tires, the wheels refer to page 85. can be rotated between the axles. Your service center will be glad to advise you. After changing the tires, check the tire inflation Correcting a flat tire pressure and correct it if necessary. Safety measures in case of a breakdown ▷ Park the vehicle as far as possible Storage from passing traffic and on solid Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with ground. Switch on the hazard warn‐ as little exposure to light as possible. ing system. Always protect tires against all contact with oil, ▷ Let the steering wheel lock engage with the grease and fuels. wheels in the straight-ahead position, set Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐ the parking brake, and engage first gear or sure indicated on the side wall of the tire. reverse, or engage selector lever position P. ▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐ side the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail.
224 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 225
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
▷ If a warning triangle or portable hazard warning lamp is required, set it up on the roadside at an appropriate distance from the rear of the vehicle. Comply with all safety guidelines and regulations.◀ The procedure to correct a flat tire depends on the equipment in the vehicle: ▷ Run-flat tires, refer to page 224. ▷ MINI Mobility System, refer to page 225. 3 Holder for the sealant bottle 4 Compressor MINI Mobility System 5 Connector and cable for the lighter socket/ socket in passenger compartment 110. Notes 6 Connection hose for connecting the com‐ ▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐ pressor and sealant bottle or the compres‐ lity System found on the compressor and sor and wheel sealant bottle. 7 On/off switch ▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐ 8 Pressure gauge for displaying the tire infla‐ tive if tire damage is greater than approx. tion pressure 1/8 in/4 mm in size. 9 Release button for reducing the tire infla‐ ▷ Contact the nearest service center if the tire tion pressure cannot be made drivable. The connector, cable, and connecting hose are ▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies stowed in the compressor housing. that have penetrated the tire. ▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant Using the Mobility System bottle and apply it to the steering wheel. To repair a flat tire with the Mobility System, proceed as follows: Sealant and compressor ▷ Filling the tire with sealant ▷ Distributing the sealant ▷ Correcting the tire inflation pressure
Filling the tire with sealant Adhere to the specified sequence Adhere to the specified sequence of the steps; otherwise, sealant may escape under high pressure.◀ 1 Sealant bottle and speed limit sticker 1. Shake the sealant bottle. 2 Filling hose 2. Pull the connection hose 6 fully out of the Note the use-by date on the sealant bottle. compressor housing and screw it onto the sealant bottle connection. Ensure that the connection hose is not kinked.
225 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 226
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
3. Insert the sealant bottle into the compres‐ If the inflation pressure of 1.8 bar/26 psi is still sor housing in a vertical position. not reached, the tire is too heavily damaged. 4. Unscrew the dust cap off of the valve of the Contact the nearest service center. defective wheel and screw the filling hose 2 of the sealant bottle onto the valve. Stowing the Mobility System 1. Unscrew the filling hose 2 of the sealant bottle from the wheel. 2. Unscrew the compressor connection hose 6 from the sealant bottle. 3. Connect the filling hose 2 of the sealant bottle with the free connector on the seal‐ ant bottle. This prevents left-over sealant from escap‐ ing from the bottle. 5. Ensure that the compressor is switched off. 4. Wrap the empty sealant bottle in suitable 6. Insert connector 5 into the lighter socket/ material to avoid dirtying the cargo area. socket in the passenger compartment, refer 5. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi‐ to page 110. cle. 7. When the engine is running: Switch on the compressor and let it run for Distributing the sealant approx. 3 to 8 minutes to fill sealant into Drive approx. 3.1 miles/5 km to evenly distrib‐ the tire and achieve a tire inflation pressure ute the sealant. of approx. 1.8 bar/26 psi. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. If While sealant is being filled, the inflation possible, do not drop below a speed of pressure may intermittently rise to approx. 10 mph/20 km/h. 5 bar/73 psi. Do not switch off the com‐ pressor in this phase. Correcting the tire inflation pressure 8. Switch off the compressor. 1. After driving approx. 3.1 miles/5 km, or about 10 minutes, stop in a suitable loca‐ Do not allow the compressor to run too tion. long 2. Screw the connection hose 6 of the com‐ Do not allow the compressor to run longer than pressor directly onto the tire valve. 10 minutes; otherwise, the device will overheat and may be damaged.◀ 3. Insert the connector 5 into the power socket in the passenger compartment. If an air pressure of 1.8 bar/26 psi is not 4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to reached: 1.8 bar/26 psi. When the engine is running: 1. Unscrew the filling hose 2 from the wheel ▷ To increase the inflation pressure: and drive forward and back approx. switch on the compressor. To check the 33 ft/10 m to evenly distribute the sealant currently set inflation pressure, switch in the tire. off the compressor. 2. Inflate the tire again using the compressor. ▷ To reduce the inflation pressure: press the release button 9.
226 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 227
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Do not allow the compressor to run too Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor if long snow chains are mounted; otherwise, the in‐ Do not allow the compressor to run longer than strument might issue an incorrect reading. 10 minutes; otherwise, the device will overheat When driving with snow chains, it may be use‐ and may be damaged.◀ ful to temporarily deactivate DSC or activate DTC, refer to page 92. If the inflation pressure is not maintained, take the vehicle on another drive, distributing the sealant, refer to page 226. Then repeat steps 1 to 4 once. If the inflation pressure of 1.8 bar/26 psi is still not reached, the tire is too heavily damaged. Contact the nearest service center.
Continuing the trip Note the maximum speed Do not exceed the maximum speed of 50 mph/80 km/h; otherwise, accidents can oc‐ cur.◀ Replace the defective tire as soon as possible and have the wheel balanced. Have the Mobility System refilled.
Snow chains Only certain fine-link snow chains have been tested by MINI, classified as safe for use, and recommended. Consult your service center for more information. Use only in pairs on the front wheels, equipped with tires of the following size: 195/60 R 16 M+S With ALL4 all-wheel drive: only mount snow chains on the front wheels. Observe the manufacturer's instructions when mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph or 50 km/h when using snow chains. Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if snow chains are mounted; otherwise, the instrument might issue an incorrect reading.
227 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 228
MOBILITY Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Vehicle equipment special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ This chapter describes all series equipment as tems. well as country-specific and special equipment When using the features and systems described offered for this model series. Therefore, it also here, adhere to local regulations. describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Vehicle identification number 5 Coolant expansion tank 232 2 Battery, under the cover 243 6 Engine compartment fuse box 244 3 Dip stick for engine oil 230 7 Reservoir for washer fluid for the headlight 4 Engine oil filler neck 230 and window washer system 63
228 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 229
Engine compartment MOBILITY
Hood 3. Press the release handle and open the hood. Notes Working in the engine compartment Never attempt to perform any service or repair operations on your vehicle without the necessary professional technical training. If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐ lines, have any work on the vehicle performed only by a service center.
If this work is not carried out properly, there is Danger of injury when the hood is open the danger of subsequent damage and related There is a danger of injury from protrud‐ safety hazards.◀ ing parts when the hood is open.◀ To avoid damage, make sure that the wiper arms are resting against the wind‐ Closing the hood shield before you open the engine compart‐ ment. Do not open the engine hood before the engine has cooled down; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Unlocking and opening the hood 1. Pull the lever.
Close the hood from a height of ap‐ prox. 16 in/40 cm with momentum. It must be clearly heard to engage.
Hood open when driving If you see any signs that the hood is not completely closed while driving, pull over im‐ 2. Lift the hood all the way. mediately and close it securely.◀ Danger of pinching Make sure that the closing path of the hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
229 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 230
MOBILITY Engine oil
Engine oil
Engine oil The oil level must be between the two marks on the dip stick. Vehicle equipment This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series. Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using the features and systems described The oil quantity between the two marks on the here, adhere to local regulations. dip stick equals approx. 1 US quart/1 liter. Do not exceed the high mark. General information Do not exceed the high mark of the dip Engine oil consumption depends on the driving stick. Overfilling oil damages the engine.◀ style and the conditions of use. A highly sporty driving style, for example, results in considera‐ bly higher engine oil consumption. Adding engine oil Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level Filler neck after refueling.
Checking the oil level with a dip stick 1. Park the vehicle on level ground when the engine is at operating temperature, i.e., af‐ ter driving continuously for at least 6 2 miles/10 km. 2. Switch the engine off. 3. After approx. 5 minutes, pull out the dip stick and wipe it off with a lint-free cloth, Add a maximum quantity of 1 US quart/1 liter paper towel, etc. of oil only after the corresponding message ap‐ 4. Carefully insert the dip stick all the way into pears on the Control Display or, in diesel en‐ the measuring tube and pull it out again. gines, after the oil level is just above the low mark of the dip stick, refer to page 230. Add oil promptly Add oil within the next 30 miles/50 km; otherwise, engine damage could result.◀
230 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 231
Engine oil MOBILITY
Too much engine oil Engine oil change Have the vehicle checked immediately; The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends otherwise, surplus oil can lead to engine dam‐ having the engine oil changed by a service cen‐ age.◀ ter.
Protect children Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐ dren and heed the warnings on the containers to prevent health risks.◀
Oil types for refilling
Notes No oil additives Do not use oil additives as these may cause engine damage.◀
Viscosity classes of engine oils When selecting an engine oil, ensure that the engine oil belongs to one of the SAE viscos‐ ity classes 0W-40, 0W-30, 5W-40, or 5W-30, or malfunctions or engine damage may occur.◀ The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine.
Approved oil types
Gasoline engine BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30
BMW Longlife-01
BMW Longlife-01 FE
Further information on approved oil types can be obtained from the service center.
Alternative oil types If the approved engine oils are not available, up to 1 US quart/1 liter of an oil with the following specification can be used:
Gasoline engine API SM or a higher quality standard
231 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 232
MOBILITY Coolant
Coolant
Vehicle equipment Coolant level This chapter describes all series equipment as Checking well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series. Therefore, it also 1. Do not open the hood until the engine has describes equipment that may not be found in cooled down. your vehicle, for instance due to the selected 2. Turn the expansion tank cap counterclock‐ special equipment or the country version. This wise slightly to allow any accumulated also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ pressure to escape; then continue turning tems. to open. When using the features and systems described 3. The coolant level is correct if it is between here, adhere to local regulations. the markings. The markings are located on the side of the coolant reservoir.
General information Danger of burns from hot engine Do not open the cooling system while the engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant may cause burns.◀
Suitable additives Only use suitable additives; otherwise, engine damage may occur. The additives are Refilling harmful to your health.◀ 1. Do not open the hood until the engine has Coolant consists of water and additives. cooled down. Not all commercially available additives are 2. Turn the expansion tank cap counterclock‐ suitable for your MINI vehicle. Ask your service wise slightly to allow any accumulated center for suitable additives. pressure to escape, then continue turning to open. 3. If the coolant level is low, slowly add cool‐ Coolant temperature ant up to the specified level; do not overfill. If the coolant and therefore the engine over‐ 4. Twist the cap closed. heat, a warning lamp lights up. A message ap‐ 5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐ pears on the Control Display. nated as soon as possible.
Disposal Comply with the appropriate environ‐ mental protection regulations when dis‐ posing of coolant additives.
232 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 233
Maintenance MOBILITY
Maintenance
Vehicle equipment The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance you need to your user This chapter describes all series equipment as profile. well as country-specific and special equipment Detailed information on service requirements offered for this model series. Therefore, it also can be displayed on the Control Display, refer describes equipment that may not be found in to page 73. your vehicle, for instance due to the selected special equipment or the country version. This Service data in the remote control also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ Information on the required maintenance is tems. continuously stored in the remote control. Your When using the features and systems described service center will read out this data and sug‐ here, adhere to local regulations. gest the right array of service procedures for your vehicle. Therefore, hand your service spe‐ cialist the remote control that you used most MINI maintenance system recently. Setting the correct date Make sure the date is set correctly; other‐ wise, the effectiveness of CBS Condition Based Service is not ensured.◀
Service and Warranty In‐ formation Booklet for The MINI maintenance system provides infor‐ US models and Warranty mation on required maintenance measures and thus provides support in maintaining road and Service Guide Book‐ safety and the operational reliability of the ve‐ let for Canadian models hicle. Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor‐ mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Condition Based Service for additional information on service require‐ CBS ments. Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐ Maintenance and repair should be performed count the various driving conditions of your by your service center. Make sure to have regu‐ MINI. Based on this, Condition Based Service lar maintenance procedures recorded in the ve‐ determines the current and future mainte‐ hicle's Service and Warranty Information Book‐ nance requirements. let for US models, and in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These entries are proof of regular maintenance.
233 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 234
MOBILITY Maintenance
Socket for OBD Onboard that fuel vapor is escaping; this will cause a dis‐ play to light up. If the filler cap is then tight‐ Diagnosis ened, the display should go out in a few days. Socket for Onboard Diagnosis The socket for Onboard Diagnosis may only be used by the service center, by work‐ shops that operate according to the specifica‐ tions of the vehicle manufacturer with appro‐ priately trained personnel, and by other authorized persons. Otherwise, its use may lead to vehicle malfunctions.◀
Primary components in the vehicle emissions can be checked via the OBD socket using a de‐ vice.
Emissions The warning lamps light up. The vehicle is producing higher emissions. You can continue your journey, but moderate your speed and exercise due caution. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Under certain circumstances, one of the lamps flashes or lights up continuously. This indicates that there is excessive misfiring or a malfunc‐ tion in the engine. If this happens, reduce the vehicle speed and drive to the next service cen‐ ter promptly. Serious engine misfiring within a brief period can seriously damage emission control components, in particular the catalytic converter. In addition, the mechanical engine components may become damaged. If the fuel filler cap is not properly tight‐ ened, the OBD system may conclude
234 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 235
Replacing components MOBILITY
Replacing components
Vehicle equipment 4. Press the new wiper blade into the fixation until it engages audibly. This chapter describes all series equipment as 5. Fold down the wiper arm. well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series. Therefore, it also Risk of damage describes equipment that may not be found in Before opening the hood, ensure that the your vehicle, for instance due to the selected wiper arms with wiper blades are folded onto special equipment or the country version. This the window; otherwise, damage may occur.◀ also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. Changing the rear wiper blade When using the features and systems described MINI Countryman: here, adhere to local regulations.
Wiper blade replacement
General information Do not fold down the wipers without wiper blades Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades have not been installed; this may damage the MINI Paceman: windshield.◀
Replacing the front wiper blades 1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm. 2. Squeeze the locking spring, arrows 1, and fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2.
1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm. 2. Turn the wiper blade all the way back, ar‐ row. 3. Press the wiper blade against the stop to push it out of the fixation. 4. Press the new wiper blade into the fixation 3. Take the wiper blade out of the catch until it engages audibly. mechanism toward the front. 5. Fold down the wiper arm.
235 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 236
MOBILITY Replacing components
Lamp and bulb replace‐ For checking and adjusting headlight aim, please contact your MINI dealer. ment Light-emitting diodes LEDs Notes In some equipment, the light source is provided by light-emitting diodes behind a cover. Lamps and bulbs These light-emitting diodes, which operate us‐ Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu‐ ing a concept similar to that applied in conven‐ tion to vehicle safety. Therefore, exercise cau‐ tional lasers, are designated as Class 1 light- tion when handling lights and bulbs. emitting diodes. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you entrust corresponding procedures to Do not remove the covers the service center if you are unfamiliar with Do not remove the covers, and never them or they are not described here. stare into the unfiltered light for several hours; You can obtain a selection of replacement otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.◀ bulbs at the service center. Headlight glass Danger of burns Condensation can form on the inside of the Only change bulbs when they are cool; headlights in cool or humid weather. When the otherwise, there is the danger of getting light is switched on, the condensation evapo‐ burned.◀ rates after a short time. The headlights do not Working on the lighting system need to be changed. When working on the lighting system, If the condensation in the headlights does not you should always switch off the lights affected evaporate after trips with the lights switched to prevent short circuits. on, and the amount of moisture in the head‐ lights increases, for example if water droplets To avoid possible injury or equipment damage form, have them checked by your service cen‐ when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions ter. provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀
Do not touch the bulbs Bi-xenon headlights Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with These bulbs have a very long life and the likeli‐ your bare hands, as even minute amounts of hood of failure is very low, provided that they contamination will burn into the bulb's surface are not switched on and off excessively. If a and reduce its service life. bulb should nevertheless fail, you can continue driving cautiously with the front fog lights, pro‐ Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, vided this is permitted by local laws. or hold the bulb by its base.◀ Do not perform work/bulb replacement Caring for the headlights, refer to page 251. on xenon headlamps For bulb replacement that is not described Have any work on the xenon lighting system, here, please contact the service center or a including bulb replacement, performed only by workshop that works according to the repair a service center. procedures of the manufacturer with corre‐ spondingly trained personnel. Due to the high voltage present in the system, there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀
236 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 237
Replacing components MOBILITY
Front lights, bulb replacement Lower LED front lights
At a glance
Headlights
1 Parking lights / daytime running lights 2 Fog lights
1 Low beams/high-beams Halogen low beams and high-beams 2 Turn signal H13 bulb, 60/55 watt Wear protective goggles and gloves Lower front lights Halogen bulbs are pressurized. Therefore, wear protective goggles and gloves. Otherwise, there is a danger of injuries if the bulb is acci‐ dentally damaged during replacement.◀
Attach the cover carefully When attaching the cover, proceed care‐ fully; otherwise, leaks may occur, causing dam‐ age to the headlamp system.◀
Access to the bulbs through the engine 1 Parking lights compartment 2 Daytime running lights or fog lights Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 236. Low beam/high-beam bulbs can be changed from the engine compartment.
237 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 238
MOBILITY Replacing components
3. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in reverse order.
LED parking lights/LED fog lights/LED daytime running lights Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 236. Lights are implemented using LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a To remove the cover: malfunction. 1. Press the tab. Turn signals/parking lights/roadside 2. Fold away the cover and take it out of the parking lights/fog lights/and daytime holder. running lights Proceed in reverse order to attach the cover. Access to the bulbs via the wheel housing Attach the cover carefully Follow the general instructions on lamps and When attaching the cover, proceed care‐ bulbs, refer to page 236. fully; otherwise, leaks may occur, causing dam‐ age to the headlamp system.◀
Replacing the bulb 1. Turn the bulb counterclockwise, arrow 1, and remove it, arrow 2.
1 Turn signal 2 Parking lights/roadside parking lights/fog lights/and daytime running lights
Replacing the turn signal bulb 2. Press the release, arrow 1, and pull off the 21-watt bulb, P 21 W, or PY 21 W connector, arrow 2. 1. Turn the wheel. 2. Remove cover 1. To do this, turn the cover counterclockwise.
238 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 239
Replacing components MOBILITY
3. Remove the inside cover. To do this, turn 3. Turn the upper bulb counterclockwise and the cover counterclockwise. remove it.
4. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and re‐ 4. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in move it. reverse order.
Replacing the front fog light bulb H8 bulb, 35 watt 1. Turn the wheel. 2. Remove cover 2. To do this, turn the cover counterclockwise. 3. Pull off the plug-in cable connector. 4. Turn the lower bulb counterclockwise and 5. Insert the new bulb and attach the covers remove it. in reverse order.
Replacing the parking light bulb and roadside parking light bulb 5-watt bulb, W 5 W
1. Turn the wheel. 2. Remove cover 2. To do this, turn the cover counterclockwise.
5. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in reverse order.
Replacing the daytime running light bulb Bulb PSX24W
1. Turn the wheel. 2. Remove cover 2. To do this, turn the cover counterclockwise. 3. Pull off the plug-in cable connector.
239 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 240
MOBILITY Replacing components
4. Squeeze the lower bulb at both tabs and MINI Countryman pull out.
1 Brake/tail light 5. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in 2 Turn signal reverse order. 3 Brake/tail light Lateral turn signals 4 Backup light 5-watt bulb, W 5 W MINI Paceman 1. Open the hood.
1 Brake light 2. Squeeze the clip, arrows, and remove the bulb holder. 2 Tail light 3. Remove the bulb by turning it to the left 3 Turn signal and replace it. 4 Backup light 4. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in reverse order. Replacing All bulbs are integrated in a central bulb holder. Side marker lights To replace these bulbs, contact the service cen‐ MINI Countryman ter. 1. Switch off the lights and take the remote control out of the ignition lock. Tail lights, bulb replacement 2. Open the tailgate. Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 236. Turn signal: 21-watt bulb, PY 21 W
240 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 241
Replacing components MOBILITY
3. Press the cover out of the cargo area side MINI Paceman panel at the rear and remove it. 1. Switch off the lights and take the remote control out of the ignition lock. 2. Open the tailgate. 3. Remove the cover from the cargo area side trim.
4. Detach the emergency release of the fuel filler flap, refer to page 212, and push it aside with the foam insert. Ensure that the emergency release is not damaged. 4. Unlock the fastening elements, arrows 1, by 5. Disengage the bulb holder by pushing turning. down the clip, arrow 1.
5. Remove the screws, arrows 2, using the hex 6. Take out the bulb holder and detach the key from the vehicle document portfolio. cable, arrow 2. 6. Remove the tail light. 7. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while 7. Disengage the bulb holder by pushing turning it to the left and remove it. down the clip, arrows 1. 8. Insert the new bulb and mount the bulb holder in reverse order. Ensure that the bulb holder engages in all fasteners. 9. Return the foam insert to its original posi‐ tion and reattach the emergency release of the fuel filler flap. 10. Reattach the cover.
8. Take out the bulb holder and detach the cable, arrow 2.
241 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 242
MOBILITY Replacing components
9. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while 3. Replace the bulb. turning it to the left and remove it. 4. Insert the light. 10. Insert the new bulb and mount the bulb holder in reverse order. Ensure that the Center brake light bulb holder engages in all fasteners. This light uses LED technology for operation. In case of a defect, please contact your service License plate lights center or a workshop that works according to 5-watt bulb, C 5 W the repair procedures of the manufacturer of your MINI with correspondingly trained person‐ Replacing nel.
MINI Countryman 1. Push the light to the left in the catch of the Changing wheels light housing using the screwdriver, ar‐ row 1. Notes The vehicle may be equipped with conven‐ tional tires with the Mobility System, refer to page 225, or with run-flat tires, refer to page 224. No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Suitable tools for changing the wheels are available from the service center as an acces‐ sory. 2. Take out the light, arrow 2. 3. Replace the bulb. Jacking points for the vehicle jack 4. Insert the light. MINI Countryman:
MINI Paceman 1. Push the light to the left in the catch of the light housing using the screwdriver, ar‐ row 1.
MINI Paceman:
2. Take out the light, arrow 2.
242 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 243
Replacing components MOBILITY
Only charge the battery in the vehicle when the engine is switched off. Connections, refer to page 245.
General information Ensure that the battery is sufficiently charged to achieve the full battery life. It may be necessary to charge the battery in the following cases: The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐ ▷ When the vehicle is frequently used to cated in the positions shown. travel short distances. ▷ When the vehicle has not been driven for Vehicle battery more than one month. Power failure Maintenance After a temporary power failure, some equip‐ The battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec‐ ment will be restricted in its use and will need trolyte will last for the life of the battery in tem‐ to be reinitialized. In addition, certain individual perate climate conditions. settings will be lost and must be updated: The service center will be happy to answer any ▷ Time and date: the values must be up‐ questions on the battery. dated, refer to page 71. Battery replacement ▷ Radio: the stations need to be stored again, refer to page 157. Use approved vehicle batteries ▷ Onboard monitor: full functionality will be Only use vehicle batteries that have been restored after some time. approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer; ▷ Glass sunroof, electrical: it may only be pos‐ otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and sible to tilt the roof. The system needs to be systems or functions may not be fully availa‐ initialized. Contact the service center. ble.◀ Have the vehicle battery registered by the serv‐ Indicator/warning lights ice center after it is replaced to ensure that all Lights up red: the vehicle battery is no comfort functions are available without restric‐ longer being charged. Alternator mal‐ tions and that any associated Check Control function. messages are no longer displayed. Switch off all unnecessary electrical consumers. Charging the battery Have the battery checked immediately.
Note Lights up yellow: the battery charge level is very low, the battery is old, or it Do not connect the charger to the socket is not securely connected. Do not connect the battery charger to the Charge the battery by taking a long drive or us‐ socket installed in the vehicle at the factory as ing an external charger. If the indicators appear this could damage the battery.◀
243 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 244
MOBILITY Replacing components
again, have the battery checked as soon as In interior possible.
Disposing of old batteries Have used batteries disposed of by the service center after they are replaced or take them to a recycling center. Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport. On the right side of the footwell.
Fuses Opening the cover Replacing fuses Push out at the recess. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and do not replace a defective fuse with a substi‐ tute of another color or amperage rating; this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately re‐ sulting in a fire in the vehicle.◀ Fuses should be replaced by the service center. Information on the fuses can be found on the inside of the covers.
In the engine compartment
Opening the cover Press the snap lock.
244 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 245
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle equipment To remove, open the two fasteners. This chapter describes all series equipment as well as country-specific and special equipment offered for this model series. Therefore, it also First aid kit describes equipment that may not be found in Some of the articles contained in the first aid kit your vehicle, for instance due to the selected have a limited service life. Therefore, check the special equipment or the country version. This use-by dates of the contents regularly and re‐ also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ place the items before they expire. tems. When using the features and systems described here, adhere to local regulations.
Hazard warning flash‐ ers
The first aid kit is located in the left side trim on the cargo area floor or under the loading floor.
Roadside Assistance
Service availability The button is located on the speedometer. Roadside Assistance can be reached around the clock in many countries. You can obtain assis‐ tance there in the event of a vehicle break‐ Warning triangle down.
Jump-starting
Notes If the battery is discharged, the engine can be started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables. In the same way, you can help jump-start another vehicle. Only use jumper cables with fully insulated clamp han‐ Under the loading edge in the cargo area. dles.
245 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 246
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance
To prevent personal injury or damage to both Connecting jumper cables vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐ Connecting order dure. Connect the jumper cables in the correct Do not touch live parts order; otherwise, there is the danger of injury To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury, from sparking.◀ always avoid all contact with electrical compo‐ 1. Open the battery cover in the engine com‐ nents while the engine is running.◀ partment to access the positive terminal.
Preparation 1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐ hicle has a voltage of 12 volts and approxi‐ mately the same capacitance in Ah. This in‐ formation can be found on the battery. 2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐ cle. 3. Switch off any electronic systems/power consumers in both vehicles. 2. Unlock the tabs of the positive terminal Bodywork contact between vehicles cover on the left and right, arrows 1, and raise the cover, arrow 2. There must not be any contact between the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise there is a danger of shorting.◀
3. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery or to a starting aid terminal of the vehicle providing assistance. 4. Attach the second clamp of the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery of the vehicle to be started. 5. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle providing as‐ sistance. 6. Attach the second clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative terminal of
246 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 247
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
the battery, or to the engine or body Using a tow fitting ground of the vehicle to be started. The screw-in tow fitting must always be carried Body ground: in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the front or rear of the MINI. The tow fitting is stowed in the following loca‐ tion, depending on the equipment: ▷ Under the right or left front seat. ▷ In the pouch of the wheel change set in the cargo area. Tow fitting, information on use ▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in. Starting the engine ▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved Never use spray fluids to start the engine. roads only. 1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and ▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g., let it run for several minutes at a slightly in‐ do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. creased idle speed. Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the 2. Start the engine of the vehicle being started vehicle can occur.◀ in the usual way. If the first starting attempt is not successful, Access to the screw thread wait a few minutes before making another Push out the tow fitting cover at the appropri‐ attempt in order to allow the discharged ate recess in the bumper. battery to recharge. 3. Let both engines run for several minutes. Front 4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse order. Check the battery and recharge if necessary.
Tow-starting and towing
Notes Observe applicable laws and regulations Observe applicable laws and regulations for tow-starting and towing.◀
No additional passengers Do not transport any passengers other than the driver in a vehicle that is being towed.◀
247 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 248
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance
Rear Towing with a tow bar Light towing vehicle The towing vehicle must not be lighter than your vehicle, or it will not be possible to control vehicle response.◀
Correctly attach the tow bar Only secure the tow bar on the tow fit‐ tings; damage can occur when it is secured on other parts of the vehicle.◀
Being towed The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. Follow the towing instructions Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting Follow all towing instructions, or vehicle the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe damage or accidents may occur.◀ the following: ▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on; ▷ Clearance and maneuvering capability will otherwise, the low beams, tail lights, turn be sharply limited during cornering. signals, and windshield wipers may be un‐ ▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it available. is attached offset. ▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle tilted, as the front wheels could turn. Towing with a tow rope ▷ When the engine is stopped, there is no When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure power assist. Consequently, more force that the tow rope is taut. needs to be applied when braking and To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on steering. the vehicle components when towing, always ▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐ use nylon ropes or nylon straps. quired. Attaching the tow rope correctly ▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐ Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit‐ pending on local regulations. ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is secured on other parts of the vehicle.◀ Manual transmission Gearshift lever in neutral position. With a tow truck: vehicles without ALL4 all-wheel drive Steptronic transmission Do not lift the vehicle Towing vehicles with a Steptronic trans‐ mission Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage Only transport vehicles with a Steptronic trans‐ may result.◀ mission on tow trucks or with raised front wheels; otherwise, the transmission may be damaged.◀
248 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 249
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
MINI Countryman: MINI Countryman:
MINI Paceman: MINI Paceman:
Have the vehicle transported with a tow truck Only transport the vehicle on a flat-bed. with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed. Tow-starting With a tow truck: vehicle with ALL4 all- If possible, start the engine by jump-starting, wheel drive refer to page 245, it rather than tow-starting Do not lift the vehicle the vehicle. Vehicles with a catalytic converter should only be tow-started when the engine is Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or cold; vehicles with an automatic transmission body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage cannot be tow-started. may result.◀ 1. Switch on the hazard warning system and Note for vehicles with ALL4 all-wheel comply with local regulations. drive 2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 57. Do not tow a vehicle with ALL4 all-wheel drive with just the front or rear axle raised; other‐ 3. Engage third gear. wise, the wheels could lock up and the transfer 4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the case could be damaged.◀ clutch is depressed and then slowly release the clutch. After the engine starts, immedi‐ ately depress the clutch completely again. 5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow bar or rope, and switch off the hazard warning system. 6. Have the vehicle checked.
249 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 250
MOBILITY Care
Care
Vehicle equipment During the winter months Ensure that the vehicle is washed more This chapter describes all series equipment as frequently in winter. Intense soiling and road well as country-specific and special equipment salt can damage the vehicle.◀ offered for this model series. Therefore, it also describes equipment that may not be found in After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes your vehicle, for instance due to the selected briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action special equipment or the country version. This can be reduced and corrosion of the brake also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ discs can occur. tems. Regularly remove foreign bodies, such as When using the features and systems described leaves, from the area of the windshield when here, adhere to local regulations. the hood is open.
Washing in automatic car washes Car washes Give preference to cloth car washes or those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint Notes damage. Steam jets or high-pressure washers Do not use automatic high-pressure washers; otherwise, water may drip into the interior in When using steam jets or high-pressure the area of the windows. washers, hold them a sufficient distance away and use a maximum temperature of Before driving into the car wash, check whether 140 ℉/60 ℃. the system is suitable for your MINI. Note the following points: Holding them too close or using excessively high pressures or temperatures can cause dam‐ ▷ Vehicle dimensions, refer to page 258. age or preliminary damage that may then lead ▷ If necessary: fold in the exterior mirrors, re‐ to long-term damage. fer to page 49. Follow the operating instructions for the high- ▷ Maximum permissible tire width. pressure washer.◀ Guide rails in car washes Do not direct steam or high-pressure washers Avoid car washes with guide rails higher toward the labels applied by the manufacturer; than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle chassis otherwise, damage may result. could be damaged.◀ Cleaning sensors/cameras with high-pres‐ Preparations before driving into the car wash: sure washers ▷ Unscrew the road antenna. When using high-pressure washers, do not ▷ Deactivate the rain sensor to avoid unin‐ spray the seals of the retractable hardtop and tentional wiper activation. the exterior sensors and cameras, for Park Dis‐ tance Control, for instance, for extended peri‐ ▷ Deactivate the rear window wiper and pro‐ ods of time and only from a distance of at least tect it from damage. Ask the car wash oper‐ 12 in/30 cm.◀ ator about any necessary protective meas‐ ures.
250 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 251
Care MOBILITY
▷ Remove additional attachments, for in‐ Do not clean mirror glass with cleaners contain‐ stance a spoiler or telephone antenna, if ing quartz. there is a risk that these may be damaged. ▷ Insert the remote control into the ignition Wiper blades lock. Clean with soapy water and replace regularly to avoid streaking. Steptronic transmission Wax and preservative residue and soiling on Before driving into the car wash, note the fol‐ the windows cause streaking during window lowing to ensure that the vehicle can roll: wiping and lead to premature wear on the wiper blades and malfunctions of the rain sen‐ 1. Insert the remote control into the ignition sor. lock, even with Comfort Access. 2. Move the selector lever to position N. 3. Release the parking brake. Vehicle care 4. Switch the engine off. 5. Leave the remote control in the ignition Car care products lock so that the vehicle can roll. Regular cleaning and care contributes signifi‐ cantly to vehicle value retention. Hand car wash The manufacturer recommends using cleaning If washing the vehicle by hand, use copious and care products from MINI, since these have quantities of water and car shampoo if neces‐ been tested and approved. sary. Clean the vehicle with a sponge or a Original MINI CareProducts have been tested washing brush by applying gentle pressure. on materials, in the laboratory, and in the field, Before cleaning the windshield, deactivate the and offer optimum care and protection for MINI rain sensor to avoid unintentional wiper activa‐ vehicles. tion or switch off the ignition. Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol Adhere to the local regulations regarding or solvents washing cars by hand. Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty Headlights grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead to surface damage.◀ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or caus‐ tic cleansers. Soak areas that have been soiled, Car care and cleaning products e.g., due to insects, with shampoo and rinse off Follow the instructions on the container. with copious quantities of water. When cleaning the interior, open the doors or Thaw ice with a window deicer; do not use an windows. ice scraper. Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐ Windows cles. Clean the outside and inside surfaces of the Cleansers can contain substances that are dan‐ windows and the mirror glasses with window gerous and harmful to your health.◀ cleaner.
251 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 252
MOBILITY Care
Vehicle paint Particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores Regular care contributes to vehicle value reten‐ and folds, and lead to increased wear and pre‐ tion and protects the paintwork against the mature degradation of the leather surface. long-term effects of paint-damaging substan‐ Therefore, remove dust from the leather regu‐ ces. larly, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner. Environmental influences in areas with higher Make especially sure that light-colored leather air pollution or natural contaminants, such as is cleaned regularly as it is more susceptible to tree resin or pollen, can have an impact on the soiling. vehicle paint. Therefore, it is important to tailor Twice a year, treat the leather with a leather lo‐ the frequency and extent of your car care to tion as dirt and grease will attack the protective these influences. layer of the leather. Immediately remove especially aggressive sub‐ stances, such as spilled fuel, oil, grease, or bird Upholstery material care droppings, to prevent damage to the paint‐ Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner to re‐ work. move superficial soiling. In case of heavy soiling, e.g., beverage stains, Correcting paint damage use a soft sponge or lint-free microfiber cloth in Depending on the severity of the damage, re‐ combination with a suitable interior cleaner. pair stone impact damage or scratches imme‐ Follow the instructions on the container. diately to prevent rust formation. Clean the upholstery material down to the The manufacturer recommends having paint seams using large sweeping motions. Avoid damage corrected with a professional repair rubbing the material vigorously. paint job according to factory specifications us‐ Damage from Velcro® fasteners ing original MINI paint materials. Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or other Preservation articles of clothing can damage the seat covers. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.◀ Preservation is needed when water no longer beads off of the clean paint surfaces. Only use paint preservation products that contain car‐ Caring for special components nauba or synthetic waxes. Interior plastic parts Caring for matte finishes These include: ▷ Do not use paint cleaners or gloss protec‐ ▷ Imitation leather surfaces tion agents such as car wax. ▷ Lamp lenses ▷ Do not polish the surface or use abrasive ▷ Indicator covers products, as these may cause the finish to ▷ Matte components become glossy. Clean with water and a solvent-free plastic Leather care cleaner if necessary. The leather processed by the manufacturer is a Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol high quality natural product. Light graininess is or solvents a typical feature of natural leather. Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
252 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 253
Care MOBILITY
grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead No chemical cleaning to surface damage.◀ Do not clean chemically; this can destroy the webbing.◀ Rubber seals Only treat with water or a rubber care product. Carpets/floor mats When cleaning rubber seals, do not use silicone No objects in the area around the pedals sprays or other care products containing sili‐ Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other cone; otherwise, noise and damage may result. objects out of the area of motion of the pedals; otherwise, the function of the pedals could be Chrome surfaces impeded while driving Carefully clean components such as the radia‐ Do not place additional floor mats over existing tor grille or door handles with an ample supply mats or other objects. of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐ ularly when they have been exposed to road Only use floor mats that have been approved salt. For additional treatment, use a chrome for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in polish. place. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened Light-alloy wheels again when they are returned after being re‐ When cleaning the wheels on the vehicle, only moved, such as for cleaning.◀ use a neutral wheel rim cleaner with a pH value Floor mats can be removed for cleaning. of 5 to 9. If they are very dirty, clean with a microfiber Do not use abrasive cleaners or a steam jet hot‐ cloth and water or an interior cleaner. To pre‐ ter than 140 ℉/60 ℃; otherwise, damage may vent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth result. Adhere to the manufacturer instructions. in the direction of travel only. Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaners may de‐ stroy the protective coating of neighboring Displays components such as the brake disc. To clean the displays, such as the radio or dis‐ play elements, use an antistatic microfiber Exterior sensors cloth. The sensors on the outside of the vehicle, such Cleaning displays as for Park Distance Control, must be kept clean and free of ice to ensure that they remain fully Do not use chemical or household cleans‐ functional. ers. Keep all fluids and moisture away from the Decorative trim unit. Clean decorative trims and fine wood compo‐ Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa‐ nents with a moist cloth only. Then dry with a ces or electrical components. soft cloth. Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage Safety belts can result.◀ Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety.
253 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 254
MOBILITY Care
CD/DVD drives No cleaning CD Do not use cleaning CDs; otherwise, parts of the drive may become damaged.◀
Long-term vehicle storage Your service center can advise you on what to consider when storing the vehicle for longer than three months.
254 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 255
Care MOBILITY
255 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15
FIND ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
NAVIGATION
ENTERTAINMENT
COMMUNICATION
MOBILITY
REFERENCE
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 258
REFERENCE Technical data
Technical data
Vehicle equipment special equipment or the country version. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ This chapter describes all series equipment as tems. well as country-specific and special equipment When using the features and systems described offered for this model series. Therefore, it also here, adhere to local regulations. describes equipment that may not be found in your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
Note The technical data and specifications in this found in the approval documents, on informa‐ Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. tion signs on the vehicle or can be obtained The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, from the service center. for example, due to the selected special equip‐ The information in the vehicle documents al‐ ment, country version or country-specific ways has priority. measurement method. Detailed values can be
Dimensions The dimensions can vary depending on the roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate, model version, equipment or country-specific for example, due to the selected special equip‐ measurement method. ment, tires, load and chassis version. The specified heights do not take into account attached parts, for example, a roof antenna,
MINI Countryman
MINI Countryman Cooper Cooper S John Cooper Works Width with mirrors inches/mm 78.6/1,996 78.6/1,996 78.6/1,996
Width without mirrors inches/mm 70.4/1,789 70.4/1,789 70.4/1,789
Height inches/mm 61.7/1,566 61.7/1,566 61.4/1,560
Length inches/mm 161.7/4,107 162.2/4,119 163.1/4,143 With aerodynamic bumper inches/mm - 163.2/4,144
Wheelbase inches/mm 102.2/2,595 102.2/2,595 102.2/2,595
Smallest turning circle dia. ft/m 38.1/11.6 38.1/11.6 38.1/11.6
258 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 259
Technical data REFERENCE
MINI Paceman
MINI Paceman Cooper Cooper S John Cooper Works Width with mirrors inches/mm 78.6/1,996 78.6/1,996 78.6/1,996
Width without mirrors inches/mm 70.3/1,786 70.3/1,786 70.3/1,786
Height inches/mm 60.4/1,533 60.4/1,533 60.1/1,527
Length inches/mm 162.2/4,119 162.4/4,124 162.8/4,134 With aerodynamic bumper inches/mm - 162.8/4,134
Wheelbase inches/mm 102.2/2,596 102.2/2,596 102.2/2,596
Smallest turning circle dia. ft/m 38.1/11.6 38.1/11.6 38.1/11.6
Weights Never exceed either the approved axle loads or the gross vehicle weight.
MINI Countryman
Cooper Cooper S Approved gross vehicle weight Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,860/1,751 3,990/1,810 Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 3,925/1,780 4,035/1,830
Load lbs/kg 830/376 830/376
Approved front axle load Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,060/934 2,145/973 Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,125/964 2,200/998
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 1,920/871 1,920/871
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/liter 17.5-42.2/ 350–1,170 17.5-42.2/ 350–1,170
Cooper S ALL4 John Cooper Works Approved gross vehicle weight Manual transmission lbs/kg 4,100/1,860 4,155/1,885
259 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 260
REFERENCE Technical data
Cooper S ALL4 John Cooper Works Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 4,145/1,880 4,200/1,905
Load lbs/kg 830/376 830/376
Approved front axle load Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,210/1,002 2,210/1,002 Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,260/1,025 2,260/1,025
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,015/914 2,070/939
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/liter 17.5-42.2/ 350–1,170 17.5-42.2/ 350–1,170
MINI Paceman
Cooper Cooper S Cooper S ALL4 John Cooper Works
Approved gross vehicle weight Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,850/1,746 3,960/1,796 4,100/1,860 4,150/1,882 Steptronic transmis‐ lbs/kg 3,920/1,778 4,010/1,819 4,140/1,878 4,200/1,905 sion
Load lbs/kg 830/376 830/376 830/376 830/376
Approved front axle load Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,050/930 2,120/962 2,180/989 2,200/998 Steptronic transmis‐ lbs/kg 2,120/962 2,170/984 2,220/1,007 2,240/1,016 sion
Approved rear axle lbs/kg 1,910/866 1,910/866 2,020/916 2,060/934 load
Approved roof load ca‐ lbs/kg 165/75 165/75 165/75 165/75 pacity
Cargo area capacity cu ft/ 13.9-40.7/ 13.9-40.7/ 13.9-40.7/ 13.9-40.7/ liter 330–1,080 330–1,080 330–1,080 330–1,080
260 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 261
Technical data REFERENCE
Capacities
Notes Fuel tank, approx. US gal/liters 12.4/47 Fuel quality, refer to page 214
261 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 262
REFERENCE Short commands for voice activation
Short commands for voice activation
Vehicle equipment General information This chapter describes all series equipment as Instructions for voice activation system, refer to well as country-specific and special equipment page 24. offered for this model series. Therefore, it also To have the available spoken instructions read describes equipment that may not be found in out loud: ›Voice commands‹ your vehicle, for instance due to the selected The following short commands apply to vehi‐ special equipment or the country version. This cles equipped with a voice activation system. also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ They have no function in vehicles in which only tems. the mobile phone is operated using the voice. When using the features and systems described here, adhere to local regulations.
Adjusting
Vehicle
Function Command Opens the main menu. ›Main menu‹
Open the options. ›Options‹
Open the settings. ›Settings‹
Settings on the Control Display. ›Control display‹
Open the time and date. ›Time and date‹
Open the language and units. ›Language and units‹
Open the speed limit. ›Speed‹
Open the light. ›Lighting‹
Open the door lock. ›Door locks‹
262 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 263
Short commands for voice activation REFERENCE
Vehicle information
Computer
Function Command Open the computer. ›Onboard info‹
Open the trip computer. ›Trip computer‹
Vehicle
Function Command Open the vehicle information. ›Vehicle info‹
Open the vehicle status. ›Vehicle status‹
Navigation
General information
Function Command Navigation menu. ›Navigation‹
Open the destination entry. ›Enter address‹
Enter the address. ›Enter address‹
Enter the town/city. ›City‹
Enter the country. ›State‹
Enter the postal code. ›Postal Code‹
Open destination guidance. ›Guidance‹
Start destination guidance. ›Start guidance‹
Terminate destination guidance. ›Stop guidance‹
Open the home address. ›Home address‹
Open the route criteria. ›Route preference‹
Open the route. ›Route information‹
Switch on the spoken instruction. ›Switch on voice instructions‹
Repeat the spoken instruction. ›Repeat voice instructions‹
263 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 264
REFERENCE Short commands for voice activation
Function Command Switch off the spoken instruction. ›Switch off voice instructions‹
Display the address book. ›Address book‹
Display the most recent destinations. ›Last destinations‹
Open the traffic bulletins. ›Traffic Info‹
Points of Interest. ›Points of interest‹
Map
Function Command Display the map. ›Map‹
Map facing north. ›Map facing north‹
Map facing the direction of travel. ›Map in direction of travel‹
Perspective map. ›Map perspective view‹
Automatic scaling of the map. ›Map with automatic scaling‹
Scale...feet. ›Map scale ... feet‹
Scale...meters. ›Map scale ... meters‹ e.g., map scale 100 meters
Scale...kilometers. ›Map scale ... kilometers‹ e.g., map scale 5 kilometers
Scale...miles. ›Map scale ... miles‹ e.g., map scale 5 miles
Destination guidance with intermediate destinations
Function Command Enter a new destination. ›Enter address‹
264 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 265
Short commands for voice activation REFERENCE
Radio
FM
Function Command Open a frequency. ›Frequency ... megahertz‹ e.g., 93.5 megahertz or frequency 93.5
Open the radio. ›Radio‹
Open the FM stations. ›F M‹
Open the manual search. ›Manual‹
Select a frequency range. ›Select frequency‹
Open a station. ›Select station‹
AM
Function Command Open a frequency. ›Frequency ... Kilohertz‹ e.g., fre‐ quency 753 or 753 kilohertz
Open the AM stations. ›A M‹
Open the manual search. ›Manual‹
Satellite radio
Function Command Open the satellite radio. ›Satellite radio‹
Switch on the satellite radio. ›Satellite radio on‹
Select a satellite radio channel. ›Select satellite radio‹ e.g., satellite radio channel 2
Stored stations
Function Command Open the stored stations. ›Presets‹
Choose a stored station. ›Select preset‹
Select a stored station. ›Preset ...‹ e.g., stored station 2
265 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 266
REFERENCE Short commands for voice activation
CD/multimedia
CD drive
Function Command Select a track. ›Track ...‹ e.g., track 5 or ›C D track ...‹ e. g., CD track 5
Play back a CD. ›C D on‹
Select a CD. ›Select C D‹
Select a CD and track. ›C D ... track ...‹ e.g., CD 3 track 5
Open the CD and Multimedia menu. ›C D and multimedia‹
CD. ›C D‹
External devices
Function Command Open the external devices. ›External devices‹
Open the Bluetooth devices. ›Bluetooth‹
Tone
Function Command Open the tone settings. ›Tone‹
Telephone
Function Command Dial a phone number. ›Dial number‹
Open the Telephone menu. ›Telephone‹
Display the phone book. ›Phonebook‹
Redialing. ›Redial‹
Display received calls. ›Received calls‹
266 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 267
Short commands for voice activation REFERENCE
Function Command List of messages. ›Messages‹
Open the Bluetooth devices. ›Bluetooth‹
Office
Function Command Open the Office menu. ›Office‹
Display Office Today. ›Current office‹
Display the contacts. ›Contacts‹
Display the messages. ›Messages‹
Display the calendar. ›Calendar‹
Display the tasks. ›Tasks‹
Display the reminders. ›Reminders‹
Contacts
Function Command Select a name. ›Choose name‹
My contacts. ›My contacts‹
Open the contacts. ›Contacts‹
New contact. ›New contact‹
267 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 268
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index A Air supply, air conditioner 99 Audio playback, Blue‐ Air supply, automatic climate tooth 171 ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐ control 101 Automatic air distribution 102 tem 92 Alarm system 39 Automatic air flow 102 Acoustic signal, refer to Check Alarm system, avoiding unin‐ Automatic car wash 250 Control 74 tentional alarms 40 Automatic climate con‐ Activated charcoal filter with Alarm system, ending an trol 101 automatic climate con‐ alarm 39 Automatic climate control, au‐ trol 103 Alarm system, interior motion tomatic air distribution 102 Adaptive Light Control 79 sensor 40 Automatic, cruise control 96 Additional telephone 188 Alarm system, tilt alarm sen‐ Automatic headlight con‐ Additives, engine oil 231 sor 40 trol 77 Airbags 81 ALL4 all-wheel system 94 Automatic transmission with Airbags, indicator/warning All-wheel drive, refer to Steptronic 64 light 84 ALL4 94 AUTO program with auto‐ Air circulation, refer to Recir‐ Alternating-code hand-held matic climate control 102 culated air mode, air condi‐ transmitter 106 AUX-IN port 167 tioner 100 AM/FM station 156 Average fuel consumption 69 Air circulation, refer to Recir‐ Ambient lighting 80 Average speed 69 culated air mode, automatic Announcement, navigation, Average speed, refer to Com‐ climate control 102 refer to Spoken instruc‐ puter 68 Air conditioning 99 tions 145 Air conditioning mode, air Antifreeze, washer fluid 63 B conditioner 99 Antilock Brake System, Air conditioning mode, auto‐ ABS 92 Backrest curvature, refer to matic climate control 101 Anti-slip control, refer to Dy‐ Lumbar support 45 Air distribution, air condi‐ namic Stability Control Backrests, refer to Seats 44 tioner, manual 100 DSC 92 Backup lights, bulb replace‐ Air distribution, auto‐ Anti-theft protection 31 ment 240 matic 102 Appointments 203 Balance 154 Air distribution, automatic cli‐ Approved engine oils 231 Bass 154 mate control, manual 103 Ashtray 109 Battery disposal 39 Air distribution, individual 100 Assistance, roadside 245 Battery, refer to Vehicle bat‐ Air drying, refer to Cooling Assistance when driving off, tery 243 function 103 refer to Hill drive-off assis‐ Battery, remote control 30 Air flow rate for air condi‐ tant 94 Battery replacement, remote tioner 100 Assistance with starting en‐ control 39 Air flow rate with automatic gine, refer to Jump-start‐ Belts, refer to Safety belts 46 climate control 102 ing 245 Belt tensioners, refer to Safety Air pressure, refer to Tire infla‐ Audio playback 165 belts 46 tion pressure 216 Bi-xenon headlights 236
268 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 269
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Black and white map dis‐ Care, displays 253 Central locking system, from play 148 Care, vehicle 251 the outside 31 Bluetooth audio 171 Cargo area, Comfort Ac‐ Central screen, see Control Bluetooth connection, activat‐ cess 37 Display 18 ing/deactivating, hands-free Cargo area door, refer to Tail‐ Changes, technical, refer to system 179 gate 35 Safety 6 Bluetooth connection, activat‐ Cargo area, enlarging, cargo Changing wheels/tires 223 ing/deactivating, mobile cover 111 Check Control 74 phone preparation 189 Cargo area, flat loading Children, transporting 52 Bluetooth hands-free sys‐ floor 113 Child restraint fixing system tem 178 Cargo area light, refer to Inte‐ LATCH 53 Brake assistant 92 rior lights 80 Child restraint fixing sys‐ Brake discs, breaking in 120 Cargo area, multi-function tems 52 Brake fluid, refer to Service re‐ hook 114 Child restraint fixing systems, quirements 73 Cargo area, opening from the mounting 52 Brake force distribution, elec‐ outside 35 Child seat, mounting 52 tronic 92 Cargo area, partition net 113 Child seats, refer to Transport‐ Brake pads, breaking in 120 Car horn, refer to Horn 12 ing children safely 52 Brake, refer to Parking Carpet, care 253 Chrome parts, care 253 brake 59 Car phone, refer to Tele‐ Circulation of air, refer to Re‐ Brakes, MINI maintenance phone 178 circulated air mode, air con‐ system 233 Car phone, refer to Telephone, ditioner 100 Brakes, service require‐ mobile phone prepara‐ Circulation of air, refer to Re‐ ments 73 tion 188 circulated air mode, auto‐ Brake system, MINI mainte‐ Car wash 250 matic climate control 102 nance system 233 CBC, Cornering Brake Con‐ Cleaning, displays 253 Braking, notes 121 trol 92 Cleaning, refer to Care 250 Braking, parking brake 59 CBS Condition Based Serv‐ Climate 99 Breakdown assistance, Road‐ ice 233 Climate mode, ventila‐ side Assistance 245 CD 164 tion 104 Breaking in 120 CD/DVD drives, care 254 Clock 67 Brightness on the Control Dis‐ CD player 164 Clock, 12h/24h format 71 play 73 Center armrest 116 Clock, setting the time and Buckle tongue, height adjust‐ Center console, refer to date 71 ment 47 Around the center con‐ Clock, setting the time Button for starting the engine, sole 16 zone 72 refer to Start/Stop button 57 Center rail 116 Closing from the inside 34 Center rail, refer to Storage Closing, from the outside 32 C compartments 116 Clutch, breaking in 120 Central locking, Comfort Ac‐ Cockpit 12 Calendar 203 cess 37 Cold start, refer to Starting the California Proposition 65 Central locking from the in‐ engine 58 Warning 7 side 34 Combination instrument, refer Car battery, refer to Vehicle Central locking system, con‐ to Displays 14 battery 243 cept 31 Car care products 251
269 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 270
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Combination switch, refer to Cornering Brake Control, Displays 14 Turn signal/high-beams/ CBC 92 Displays and controls 12 headlight flasher 60 Corrosion on brake discs 122 Displays, care 253 Combination switch, refer to Cradle for telephone or mobile Displays, cleaning 253 Washer/wiper system 60 phone, refer to Snap-in Displays, refer to Instrument Comfort Access 37 adapter 198 cluster 14 Comfort Access, in the car Cruise control 96 Disposal, remote control bat‐ wash 38 Cupholders 109 tery 39 Comfort Access, replacing the Current fuel consumption 69 Distance warning, refer to battery 39 Current location, storing 136 Park Distance Control Comfort area, refer to Around Curve lights, refer to Adaptive PDC 97 the center console 16 Light Control 79 Door key, refer to Remote Compartment for remote con‐ control with integrated trol, refer to Ignition lock 57 D key 30 Compass, digital 107 Door lock 34 Computer 68 Dashboard lighting, refer to Door lock, confirmation sig‐ Computer, displaying informa‐ Instrument lighting 79 nals 33 tion 68 Dashboard, refer to Cock‐ Doors, manual operation 34 Condition Based Service pit 12 Doors, unlocking and locking, CBS 233 Dashboard, refer to Dis‐ confirmation signals 33 Confirmation signals for vehi‐ plays 14 Doors, unlocking and locking cle locking/unlocking 33 Date, date format 72 from the inside 34 Connecting, mobile phone, re‐ Date, setting 72 Doors, unlocking and locking, fer to Mobile phone, pairing, Daytime running lights 78 from the outside 32 hands-free system 179 Decorative trim, care 253 DOT Quality Grades 220 Connecting, mobile phone, re‐ Defogging windows 100 Drive-off assistant, refer to Hill fer to Pairing the mobile Defroster, rear window, auto‐ drive-off assistant 94 phone 189 matic climate control 103 Driving notes, breaking Consumption, refer to Aver‐ Defroster, rear window, with in 120 age fuel consumption 69 air conditioner 100 Driving off on hills, refer to Hill Contacts for hands-free sys‐ Defrosting windows 100 drive-off assistant 94 tem 185 Defrost setting, refer to De‐ Driving on poor roads 123 Contacts, office 200 frosting windows 100 Driving stability control sys‐ Control Display 18 Destination entry via the ad‐ tems 92 Control Display, care 253 dress book 136 Driving tips, refer to Driving Control Display, settings 72 Destination guidance with in‐ notes 120 Controls and displays 12 termediate destinations 141 Dry air, refer to Cooling func‐ Control systems, driving stabil‐ Destination input, naviga‐ tion 103 ity 92 tion 134 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ Convenient operation, win‐ Digital compass 107 trol 92 dow 32 Digital radio 158 DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐ Coolant temperature 68 Dip stick, engine oil 230 trol 93 Cooling function, switching on Directional indicators, refer to DTMF suffix dialing, hands- and off 103 Turn signals 60 free system 181 Cooling, maximum 102 Display lighting, refer to In‐ strument lighting 79
270 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 271
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
DTMF suffix dialing, mobile Engine oil types, alterna‐ Fan, refer to Air flow rate with phone preparation pack‐ tive 231 automatic climate con‐ age 193 Engine oil types, ap‐ trol 102 Dynamic destination guid‐ proved 231 Fastening safety belts, refer to ance 150 Engine, overheating, refer to Safety belts 46 Dynamic Stability Control Coolant temperature 68 Fault messages, refer to Check DSC 92 Engine start, assistance 245 Control 74 Dynamic Traction Control Engine, starting 58 Filling capacities 261 DTC 93 Engine, starting, Comfort Ac‐ Filter, refer to Activated-char‐ cess 37 coal filter 101 E Engine, starting, Start/Stop Filter, refer to Microfilter 101 button 57 Filter, refer to Microfilter/acti‐ Electrical malfunction, door Engine, stopping, Start/Stop vated-charcoal filter with au‐ lock 34 button 57 tomatic climate control 103 Electrical malfunction, fuel Engine, switching off 59 First aid kit 245 filler flap 212 Equipment, interior 105 First aid, refer to First aid Electronic brake-force distri‐ ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐ kit 245 bution 92 gram, refer to Dynamic Sta‐ Flashing when locking/unlock‐ Electronic Stability Program bility Control DSC 92 ing 33 ESP, refer to Dynamic Stabil‐ Exchanging wheels/tires 223 Flat tire, Flat Tire Monitor 85 ity Control DSC 92 Exterior mirrors 49 Flat tire, indicator/warning Emergency operation, fuel Exterior mirrors, adjusting 49 lamp 85 filler flap, unlocking man‐ Exterior mirrors, folding in and Flat Tire Monitor FTM 84 ually 212 out 50 Flat Tire Monitor FTM, flat tire Emergency operation, refer to Exterior sensors, care 253 message 85 Manual operation 34 External devices 167 Flat Tire Monitor FTM, initializ‐ Emergency operation, Step‐ External temperature dis‐ ing the system 85 tronic transmission, refer to play 67 Flat Tire Monitor FTM, snow Selector lever lock, overrid‐ External temperature display, chains 84 ing 66 changing the unit of meas‐ Flat Tire Monitor FTM, system Energy, saving, refer to Saving ure 71 limits 84 fuel 128 External temperature display, Flat tire, run-flat tire 86 Engine, breaking in 120 on onboard computer 71 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐ Engine compartment 228 External temperature warn‐ tor 86 Engine oil, adding 230 ing 67 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor Engine oil, additives, refer to TPM 86 Approved engine oils 231 F Flat tire, wheel change 242 Engine oil, alternative oil Floor mats, care 253 types 231 Fader 154 FM/AM station 156 Engine oil change intervals, Failure messages, refer to Fog lights 79 refer to Service require‐ Check Control 74 Foot brake 121 ments 73 False alarm, refer to Avoiding Footwell lights, refer to Inte‐ Engine oil, dip stick 230 unintentional alarms 40 rior lights 80 Engine oil, filling capacity 261 Fan, refer to Air flow rate for Four-wheel drive, refer to Engine oil, MINI maintenance air conditioner 100 ALL4 94 system 233 Front airbags 81
271 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 272
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Front fog light, bulb replace‐ Gear change, Steptronic trans‐ Head restraints, adjusting the ment 238 mission 64 height 48 Front fog lights 79 Gear display, Steptronic trans‐ Head restraints, removing 49 Front lights, bulb replace‐ mission 64 Heatable rear window, air ment 237 Glare protection 107 conditioner 100 Front passenger airbags, de‐ Glass sunroof, electrical 40 Heatable windshield 103 activating 82 Glass sunroof, electrical, open‐ Heating, rear window with au‐ FTM Flat Tire Monitor 84 ing/closing 41 tomatic climate control 103 Fuel 214 Glass sunroof, electrical, rais‐ Heating, seats 46 Fuel, additives 214 ing 41 Heating, windshield 103 Fuel, average consump‐ Glass sunroof, electric, con‐ Height adjustment, seats 44 tion 69 venient operation 32 High-beams 78 Fuel cap, closing 212 Glass sunroof, electric, remote High beams, bulb replace‐ Fuel consumption display, control 32 ment 237 average fuel consump‐ GPS navigation, refer to Navi‐ High-beams, indicator tion 69 gation system 132 lamp 15 Fuel filler flap, closing 212 Hill drive-off assistant 94 Fuel filler flap, opening 212 H Hills 122 Fuel filler flap, unlocking in Holder for remote control, re‐ case of an electrical malfunc‐ Halogen headlights, bulb re‐ fer to Ignition lock 57 tion 212 placement 237 Homepage 6 Fuel gauge 68 Handbrake, refer to Parking Hood 229 Fuel, refer to Average fuel brake 59 Hood, closing 229 consumption 69 Hand car wash, care 251 Hood, opening 229 Fuel, saving 128 Hand-held transmitter, alter‐ Hood, unlocking 229 Fuel tank capacity, refer to nating code 106 Horn 12 Filling capacities 261 Hands-free microphone 16 House number, entering for Fuel tank contents, refer to Hands-free system 178 navigation 135 Filling capacities 261 Hazard warning system 16 Hydraulic brake assistant 92 Fuel tank, refer to Filling ca‐ HD Radio 158 pacities 261 Head airbags 81 I Fuse 244 Headlamp control, refer to Parking lamps/low Ice warning, refer to External G beams 77 temperature warning 67 Headlamps, care 251 Icy roads, refer to External Garage door opener, refer to Headlight control, auto‐ temperature warning 67 Integrated universal remote matic 77 Identification marks, run-flat control 105 Headlight courtesy delay fea‐ tires 224 Gasoline 214 ture 78 Identification marks, tires 220 Gasoline gauge, refer to Fuel Headlight flasher 60 iDrive, changing settings 72 gauge 68 Headlight flasher, indicator iDrive, changing the date and Gas station recommenda‐ lamp 15 time 71 tion 145 Headlights 77 iDrive, changing the lan‐ Gear change, manual trans‐ Headlights, cleaning, washer guage 72 mission 63 fluid 63 Head restraints 48
272 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 273
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
iDrive, changing the units of Integrated universal remote Lamps 77 measure and display for‐ control 105 Lamps, automatic headlight mat 71 Interactive map 139 control 77 iDrive, setting the bright‐ Interior equipment 105 Language, changing on the ness 73 Interior lights 80 Control Display 72 Ignition 58 Interior lights, remote con‐ Lap-and-shoulder belt, refer Ignition key position 1, refer trol 33 to Safety belts 46 to Radio ready state 57 Interior mirror 50 LATCH child restraint fixing Ignition key position 2, refer Interior motion sensor 40 system 53 to Ignition on 58 Interior rearview mirror, com‐ Leather, care 252 Ignition key, refer to Remote pass 107 Leather care 252 control with integrated Interior temperature, setting, LEDs, light-emitting di‐ key 30 air conditioner 99 odes 236 Ignition lock 57 Interior temperature, setting, Letters and numbers, enter‐ Ignition, switched off 58 automatic climate con‐ ing 22 Ignition, switched on 58 trol 101 License plate light, bulb re‐ Indicator and warning lamps, Internet page 6 placement 240 Tire Pressure Monitor Intersection, entering for navi‐ Light-alloy wheels, care 253 TPM 87 gation 135 Light-emitting diodes, Indicator and warning LEDs 236 lights 15 J Lighter, socket 109 Individual air distribution 100 Lighting, instruments 79 Inflation pressure monitor, re‐ Jump-starting 245 Lighting, lamp and bulb re‐ fer to Flat Tire Monitor 84 placement 236 Inflation pressure monitor, re‐ K Lighting, vehicle, refer to fer to Tire Pressure Monitor Lamps 77 TPM 86 Keyless Go, refer to Comfort Lights, parking lamps/low Inflation pressure, refer to Tire Access 37 beams 77 inflation pressure 216 Keyless opening and closing, Light switch 77 Information on the navigation refer to Comfort Access 37 Limit, refer to Speed limit 90 data 132 Key Memory, refer to Personal Lock buttons on doors, refer Initializing, compass, refer to Profile 30 to Locking 35 Calibrating 108 Key, refer to Remote control Locking from the inside 35 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor with integrated key 30 Locking, from the outside 33 FTM 85 Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐ Locking, setting the confirma‐ Initializing, glass sunroof, mission 65 tion signal 33 electrical 41 Knee airbag 81 Locking the vehicle from the Initializing, refer to Setting the Knocking control 214 inside 34 time and date 71 Locking vehicle, from the out‐ Instrument cluster, refer to L side 32 Displays 14 Locking without remote con‐ Instrument lighting 79 Lamp and bulb replacement, trol, refer to Comfort Ac‐ Instruments, refer to Cock‐ bulb replacement 236 cess 37 pit 12 Lamp, replacing, refer to Longlife oils, alternative oil Integrated key 30 Lamp and bulb replace‐ types 231 ment 236
273 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 274
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Longlife oils, refer to Ap‐ Map view 146 MP3 player 167 proved engine oils 231 Marking on approved Low beams 77 tires 223 N Low beams, automatic 77 Maximum cooling 102 Low beams, bulb replace‐ Maximum speed, winter Navigation 132 ment 237 tires 224 Navigation data 132 Lower back support, refer to Menu operation, onboard Navigation data, updat‐ Lumbar support 45 monitor 18 ing 132 Lumbar support 45 Menus, refer to Onboard Navigation system, destina‐ monitor operating con‐ tion entry by voice 140 M cept 19 Neck restraints, refer to Head Message list, traffic bulle‐ restraints 48 Main inspection, refer to Serv‐ tins 147 New wheels and tires 223 ice requirements 73 Messages 202 Notes 6, 204 Maintenance, refer to Service Microfilter 101 Nozzles, refer to Ventila‐ booklet Microfilter, with automatic cli‐ tion 104 Maintenance, refer to Service mate control 103 requirements 73 MINI Connected 207 O Maintenance require‐ MINI Homepage 6 ments 233 MINI Internet page 6 OBD Onboard Diagnos‐ Maintenance system MINI maintenance sys‐ tics 234 MINI 233 tem 233 OBD socket, refer to Socket Makeup mirror 107 MINI Mobility System 225 for OBD Onboard Diagno‐ Malfunction, door lock 34 Minimum tread, tires 222 sis 234 Malfunction, fuel filler Mirrors 49 Octane number, refer to Fuel flap 212 Mirrors, folding in and out 50 quality 214 Malfunction, Steptronic trans‐ Mirrors, interior mirror 50 Octane rating, refer to Recom‐ mission 66 Mobile communication devi‐ mended fuel grade 214 Malfunction warnings, refer to ces in the vehicle 121 Odometer 67 Check Control 74 Mobile phone, refer to Tele‐ Office 199 Manual air distribution, air phone, mobile phone prepa‐ Oil additives 231 conditioner 100 ration 188 Oil level 230 Manual air distribution, auto‐ Mobile phone, refer to Tele‐ Oil types, alternative 231 matic climate control 103 phone with hands-free sys‐ Oil types, approved 231 Manual mode, Steptronic tem 178 Onboard Diagnostics transmission 65 Mobile phone with hands-free OBD 234 Manual operation, door system 178 Onboard monitor 18 lock 34 Mobile phone with mobile Opening and closing, Comfort Manual operation, fuel filler phone preparation 188 Access 37 flap 212 Mobility System 225 Opening and closing from the Manual operation, selector Modifications, technical, refer inside 34 lever lock, Steptronic trans‐ to Safety 6 Opening and closing, from the mission 66 Monitor, see Control Dis‐ outside 32 Map, destination entry 139 play 18 Opening and closing, using Map display in black and Mounting of child restraint fix‐ the door lock 34 white 148 ing systems 52
274 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 275
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Opening and closing, via the Position, storing 136 Rear seat backrests, foldable, remote control 32 Postal code, entering in navi‐ MINI Countryman 111 Opening and unlocking from gation 135 Rear seat backrests, foldable, the inside 35 Power windows 42 MINI Paceman 112 Operating concept of the on‐ Power windows, refer to Win‐ Rearview mirror, refer to Mir‐ board monitor 18 dows 41 rors 49 Outside air mode, automatic Prescribed engine oils, refer to Rear window defroster with climate control 102 Approved engine oils 231 air conditioner 100 Outside air, refer to Recircu‐ Pressure monitoring of tires, Rear window defroster with lated air mode, air condi‐ refer to Tire Pressure Monitor automatic climate con‐ tioner 100 TPM 86 trol 103 Outside air, refer to Recircu‐ Pressure, tires 216 Rear window, washing 62 lated air mode, automatic Pressure warning, tires 84 Rear window wiper 62 climate control 102 Profile depth, refer to Mini‐ Recirculated air mode, air Overheating of engine, refer mum tread depth 222 conditioner 100 to Coolant temperature 68 Profile, tires 221 Recirculated air mode, auto‐ Protective function, refer to matic climate control 102 P Pinch protection system, Recommended fuel windows 42 grade 214 Pairing, mobile phone 189 Recommended tire Pairing, mobile phone, hands- R brands 223 free system 179 Redialing, hands-free sys‐ Park Distance Control PDC 97 Radio 156 tem 181 Parking aid, refer to Park Dis‐ Radio-operated key, refer to Redialing, mobile phone prep‐ tance Control PDC 97 Remote control with aration package 193 Parking assistant, refer to Park integrated key 30 Releasing, refer to Unlock‐ Distance Control PDC 97 Radio ready state 57 ing 37 Parking brake 59 Radio ready state, switched Remaining range for service, Parking light, bulb replace‐ off 58 refer to Service require‐ ment 238 Radio ready state, switched ments 73 Parking lights 77 on 57 Remaining range, refer to Parking lights/low beams 77 Radio setting, refer to Radio Range 69 PDC Park Distance Control 97 ready state 57 Reminders 205 Personal information 199 Rain sensor 61 Remote control 30 Personal Profile 30 Random 165 Remote control, battery re‐ Pinch protection, windows 42 Random playback 165 placement 39 Pivoting sun visor 107 Range 69 Remote control, Comfort Ac‐ Plastic, care 252 RDS 157 cess 37 Pollen, refer to Microfilter 101 Reading out loud 205 Remote control, Comfort Ac‐ Pollen, refer to Microfilter/ Rear 45 cess, malfunctions 38 activated-charcoal filter 101 Rear fog light, bulb replace‐ Remote control, garage door Pollen, refer to Microfilter/ ment 240 opener 105 activated-charcoal filter with Rear fog lights, indicator Remote control, radio interfer‐ automatic climate con‐ lamp 15 ence 33 trol 103 Rear lights, refer to Tail Remote control, removing Poor road operation 123 lights 240 from the ignition lock 57
275 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 276
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Remote control, service Safety 6 Settings, changing on the data 233 Safety belts 46 Control Display 72 Remote control, univer‐ Safety belts, care 253 Settings, clock, 12h/24h sal 105 Safety belts, damage 48 mode 71 Remote inquiry, hands-free Safety belts, indicator/warning Settings, configuring, refer to system 181 lamp 48 Personal Profile 30 Remote inquiry, mobile phone Safety belts, rear center safety Settings, language 72 preparation package 193 belt 47 Shifting, manual transmis‐ Replacement remote con‐ Safety belts, reminder 48 sion 63 trol 30 Safety systems, airbags 81 Shifting, Steptronic transmis‐ Replacing wheels/tires 223 Safety systems, safety sion 65 Reporting safety defects 9 belts 46 Shift lever, Steptronic trans‐ Reserve warning, refer to Fuel Satellite radio 158 mission 64 gauge 68 Saving fuel 128 Shift paddles on the steering Reservoir for washer fluid, re‐ Scale, changing during navi‐ wheel 65 fer to Washer fluid reser‐ gation 147 Short commands, voice acti‐ voir 63 Screen, see Control Display 18 vation 262 Restraining systems, refer to Seat adjustment 45 Side airbags 81 Safety belts 46 Seat adjustment, manual 44 Side windows, refer to Win‐ Restraint systems for chil‐ Seat heating 46 dows 41 dren 52 Seats 44 Sitting safely 44 Retreaded tires 223 Seats, adjusting 44 Sliding/tilting sunroof, refer to Reverse gear, manual trans‐ Seats, heating 46 Glass sunroof, electrical 40 mission 64 Seats, sitting safely 44 Slot for remote control 57 Road, avoiding 143 Selector lever lock, overrid‐ Snap-in adapter, mobile Road detour 143 ing 66 phone 198 Roadside Assistance 245 Selector lever lock, refer to Se‐ Snow chains 227 Roadside parking light, bulb lector level positions, chang‐ Socket, OBD Onboard Diagno‐ replacement 238 ing, shiftlock 64 sis 234 Roadside parking lights 78 Selector lever positions, Step‐ Software applications, RON recommended fuel tronic transmission 64 iPhone 207 grade 214 Selector lever, Steptronic Software part number, hands- RON, refer to Fuel quality 214 transmission 64 free system 178 Route 144 Service and warranty 7 Software part number, mobile Route criteria, route 143 Service data in the remote phone preparation 188 Route, displaying 144 control 233 Software update 174 Route section, bypassing 144 Service interval display, refer Special destinations, naviga‐ Rubber seals, care 253 to Condition Based Service tion 138 Run-flat tires 224 CBS 233 Special equipment, series Run-flat tires, flat tire 85 Service interval display, refer equipment 6 Run-flat tires, tire inflation to Service requirements 73 Speed, average 69 pressure 216 Service requirements 73 Speed limit 90 Service requirements, CBS Speed limit, setting 90 S Condition Based Service 233 Speedometer 14 Settings and information 70 Speed, with winter tires 224 Safe braking 121
276 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 277
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Spoken instructions, naviga‐ T Tire identification marks 220 tion 145 Tire inflation pressure 216 Sport button 94 Tachometer 68 Tire inflation pressure, pres‐ Sport program, Steptronic Tailgate 35 sure loss, FTM 85 transmission 65 Tailgate, Comfort Access 37 Tire pressure loss, RDC 87 Stability control systems 92 Tailgate, opening/closing 35 Tire, pressure monitoring, re‐ Start/Stop button 57 Tailgate, opening from the fer to Tire Pressure Monitor Start/Stop button, starting the outside 35 TPM 86 engine 58 Tail lights 240 Tire pressure monitor, refer to Start/Stop button, switching Tank gauge, refer to Fuel Flat Tire Monitor 84 off the engine 59 gauge 68 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 86 Starting the engine 58 Tasks 204 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM, Start problems, refer to Jump- Technical changes, refer to system limits 89 starting 245 Safety 6 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM, State/province, selecting for Telephone, adjusting the vol‐ system reset 87 navigation 134 ume, hands-free system 181 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM, Stations, stored 163 Telephone, adjusting the vol‐ warning lamp 87 Station, storing 157 ume, mobile phone prepara‐ Tire Quality Grading 220 Status information, onboard tion package 193 Tires, breaking in 120 monitor 21 Telephone, hands-free sys‐ Tires, changing 223 Steering wheel 51 tem 178 Tires, condition 221 Steering wheel, adjusting 51 Telephone, mobile phone Tires, damage 222 Steering wheel lock 57 preparation 188 Tire size 220 Steering wheel, shift pad‐ Temperature, air condi‐ Tires, minimum tread 222 dles 65 tioner 100 Tires, retreaded tires 223 Steptronic transmission 64 Temperature, automatic cli‐ Tires, storage 224 Steptronic transmission, kick‐ mate control 103 Tire tread 221 down 65 Temperature, changing the Toll roads, route 143 Steptronic transmission, over‐ unit of measure 71 Tone 154 riding the selector lever Temperature, coolant, refer to Towing another vehicle 247 lock 66 Coolant temperature 68 Towing, being towed 247 Stopping, engine 59 Temperature display Town/city, navigation 134 Storage, tires 224 – External temperature warn‐ Tow-starting 247 Storing the vehicle 254 ing 67 TPM, refer to Tire Pressure Street, entering for naviga‐ Temperature display, external Monitor 86 tion 135 temperature 67 Traction control 93 Summer tires, refer to Wheels Temperature display, setting Traffic bulletins, naviga‐ and tires 216 the units 71 tion 147 Summer tires, tread 221 Temperature warning 67 Transmission lock, refer to Sun visor 107 Text messages 202 Changing the selector lever Switches, refer to Cockpit 12 Theft alarm system, refer to positions 64 Switching off, engine 59 Alarm system 39 Transmission, overriding the Switching off, vehicle 59 Tilt alarm sensor 40 selector lever lock with Step‐ Symbols 6 Time, setting the time 71 tronic transmission 66 Tire age 222 Transmission, refer to Manual Tire, flat tire 85 transmission 63
277 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 278
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Transmission, see Steptronic V Washer fluid reservoir 63 transmission 64 Washing, vehicle 250 Transporting children Vanity mirror 107 Welcome lights 78 safely 52 Vehicle battery 243 Wheel change 242 Treble, tone 154 Vehicle, breaking in 120 Wheels and tires 216 Trip-distance counter, refer to Vehicle care 251 Wheels, changing 223 Trip odometer 67 Vehicle care, refer to Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor Triple turn signal activa‐ Care 250 FTM 84 tion 60 Vehicle equipment 6 Window, convenient opera‐ Trip odometer 67 Vehicle identification number, tion 32 Trips, planning 141 hands-free system 178 Windows 41 Trunk lid, refer to Tailgate 35 Vehicle identification number, Windows, care 251 Trunk, refer to Cargo area 35 mobile phone prepara‐ Windows, closing 42 Turning lights, refer to Adap‐ tion 188 Windows, defrosting and de‐ tive Light Control 79 Vehicle paintwork, care 252 fogging 100 Turn signal, bulb replace‐ Vehicle storage 254 Windows, opening 42 ment 238 Vehicle, switching off 59 Windows, pinch protection 42 Turn signal indicator lamp 14 Vehicle wash 250 Windshield defroster 103 Turn signals 60 Ventilation, air condi‐ Windshield, defrosting and Turn signals, triple turn signal tioner 104 defogging 100 activation 60 Version of the navigation Windshield, defrosting, refer data 132 to Defrosting windows 100 U Video playback, iPhone 170 Windshield wash 60 Video playback, snap-in Windshield washer fluid 63 Uniform Tire Quality Grading/ adapter 170 Windshield wash, rear win‐ UTQG 220 Voice activation, naviga‐ dow 62 Unintentional alarms, avoid‐ tion 140 Windshield wash, reservoir for ing 40 Voice activation, short com‐ washer fluid 63 Units, average fuel consump‐ mands 262 Windshield wash, washer tion 71 Voice activation system 24 fluid 63 Units of measure, changing on Volume, setting 154 Windshield wiper blades, the Control Display 71 changing 235 Units, temperature 71 W Windshield wiper, refer to Universal remote control 105 Washer/wiper system 60 Unlocking from the inside 35 Warning and indicator Winter storage, care 254 Unlocking, from the out‐ lamps 15 Winter tires 223 side 32 Warning messages, refer to Winter tires, setting the speed Unlocking, tailgate 37 Check Control 74 limit 90 Unlocking, without remote Warning signal volumes 154 Winter tires, tread 221 control, refer to Comfort Ac‐ Warning triangle 245 Wiper blades, care 251 cess 37 Washer/wiper system 60 Wiper blades, changing 235 Update, software 174 Washer/wiper system, rain Wiper fluid 63 Upholstery care 252 sensor 61 Word match concept, naviga‐ Upholstery material care 252 Washer/wiper system, washer tion 23 fluid 63 Washer fluid 63
278 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15 Seite 279
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Y
Your individual vehicle, set‐ tings, refer to Personal Pro‐ file 30
279 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15
*BL296111000K* 01 40 2 961 110 ue 01 40 2 961 110
DRIVE ME.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 110 - II/15